Home

2015 FIAT 500 Abarth (Includes Cabrio) Owner`s Manual

1. ll TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION 272 W TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS 284 Tite PISO eee ke teRPERP ERO RENS 272 W TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM Tire Inflation Pressures lisse 274 EM pit Rion Se Bene ey eae epa zB Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 275 a keene qid AEG EES ni Radial Ply Tires 5 esee 275 i E em DU NENNT ERE 276 eae IMG DNE Run Flat Tires If Equipped ogg B FUEL REQUIREMENTS oss sc reete 295 Spare Tires If Equipped s s0 278 Reformulated Gasoline llus 296 Tire Spinning iic eeu 280 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 296 Tread Wear Indicators 281 Erga Usage Ii Non Mek Puel Vee pees zd Fur P n 282 MM A aM ERE dd Replacement res ccce 282 Materials Added To Fuel 297 Fuel System Cautions 00 298 E TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES 284 226 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Carbon Monoxide Warnings 299 W TRAILER TOWING 0 301 B ADDING FUEL 300 Bl RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 300 MOTORHOME BIC ssoksyantpeis iepa 9n Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 302 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 301 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 227 STARTING PROCEDURES Before startin
2. CONTENTS ll A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS 11 Ignition Key Removal sses steers egetar 11 Locking Doors With A Key 4 13 Key In Ignition Reminder 13 E SENTRY KEY usse 13 Replacement Keys 0000 14 General Information 00 15 ll REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED s 2 xi exe eR aad cad 15 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 15 Remote Key Unlock Driver Door AIl Doors 1st Pre88 ey eae Bos a SS oa lee Bie Sate we ug SOROR 16 Opening Power Top Remote Function 16 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 18 Programming Additional Transmitters 18 Transmitter Battery Replacement 18 General Information 00 20 DOOR LOCKS icra ciae RURALES SEA 20 Power Door Locks If Equipped 22 AXutoclOSG eoi re ae ae eee Re 23 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee E POWER WINDOWS 5229x333 CR 23 Transporting Pets asado dante 9 Wee Cen 76 Power Window Switches 05 23 Mi ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS 76 PMO DOWN oca kobe seas ded eR ees CER E ERA 25 ME SAFETY DIES uu esu Reg on Ex RR HORE Y Ma 77 Wind Buffeting sconce biran ondina inia 24 Transporting Passengers 000 77 B LIFIGATE i
3. ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 CAUTION DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground This vehicle may also be towed using a tow dolly with the front wheels OFF the ground Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may be flat towed with all four wheels on the ground at any legal highway speed for any distance if the manual transmission is in NEUTRAL automatic transmission Damage to the drivetrain will result If these vehicles require towing make sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission damage Dam age from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS ll HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS 307 W JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING IF B VOUS ENGINE OWES oe chia Eoo o E 320 E TIRE SERVICE KIT IF EQUIPPED 308 EE Tire Service Kit Storage 0 000 309 Diep ate nome HOR eng Jacking Instructions 04 Tire Service Kit Components And Operation 309 Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions 310 UME STARTING PROCEDURE ap ipanaa d Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit 313 Preparations Por FUSE docendi crs wai E WHEEL AND TIRE
4. 2015 FIAT 500 ABARTH OWNER S MANUA INCLUDES CABRIO VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public trans portation Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improve ments to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manu factured FIAT is a registered trademark of Fiat Group Marketing amp Corporate Communication S p A
5. 0000008 363 Pressure Cap caes dore do eer enit Rag dnb c 363 Selection Of Coolant Antifreeze 360 Corrosion Protection 2 0 0 00000 370 Cruise Liglit 52 eese ERE BES Re 148 Cupholders oe deer Reg meae 136 Customer Assistance 0 0 0 ce eee 400 Data Recorder Event 000 cece eae 53 Daytime Running Lights 111 Dealer Service reaus aa eaa cee eee 344 Defroster Windshield ranso divras 79 Diagnostic System Onboard 342 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission 369 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 364 Door LOCKS 2 ooh dene ears E a ea Ae e 20 Door Locks Automatic leen 23 Downshitting ces esea tegia m bees oa wes 232 Driving Through Flowing Rising Or Shallow Standing WALGER p RIT 245 Electrical Power Outlets llle 133 Electric Remote Mirrors llle 91 Electronic Brake Control System Ls 252 Brake Assist System llle 254 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 119 Electronic Stability Control ESC 256 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 161 Exit THp uu debe ud RE uen ae oe es 167 New Trip a ER RPRREMEE Ys 167 Start Of Trip Procedure 0 0 167 Trip Computer saa eruta ee gem Das 166 Trip Functons ius e eene m Re ia 168 Emergency In Case Of Hazard Warning Flasher 307
6. 418 INDEX EE Maintenance Free Battery s lt ies iaci eaaa 349 Maintenance General nunnana uaaa aaa 345 Maintenance Procedures n noaa aaau 345 Maintenance Schedule nnan anaana aaaea aaa 394 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 342 Manual Service llle 404 Manual Transmission lees 230 Fluid Level Check ellen 368 Frequency Of Fluid Change 368 Lubricant Selection llle 368 Master Cylinder Brakes 00 366 Media Hub ia susicssc n hee ane ea R4 99 MOTTO Soia ae e E OPUP Ger Wu RP P REGE CAU S 89 Automatic Dimming ees 90 Electric Powered llle 91 Heated zie y eR Cer piii ep fea 93 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Monitor Tire Pressure System 286 Multi Function Control Lever lll 109 New Vehicle Break In Period 0005 76 Occupant Restraints 555 eiu e ek Beas 26 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel sss 295 Odometer seac oe 2 RR RR PPS RE RS 148 UTP oi ea s Segue os artet a do tae 148 Oil Change Indicator llle 165 Oil Change Indicator Reset 0 0 165 Oil Engines cod cete o s e nS oben taney 346 Capacity xa edd beue pes bow Pneus 389 Change Interval seess si 0 0 00 cee ee eee 346 Checking 2c cs heed i o m a 346 Disposals gs sasada E aang E EE E aE ORE 347 Filter esenca cespe s X ERE awe Se bale 348 Fil
7. Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual 6 INTRODUCTION QQoX DesdeoecouS amp ocboesde0 o0 2OSF Naty oan gn wg ego cse E qx 9 ARS HM s Am 7 OSON DLE COA amp COLMAR Bec Mmm numm vum ETT one JST sess INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owner s Manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cau tions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears engraved on the right front door sill under the sill scuff plate on an adhesive label applied to the right door opening on the B Pillar on the vehicle registration and title Vehicle Identification Number 8 INTRODUCTION VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death Stamped VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
8. Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 410 INDEX EE Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 361 Adding Fuel sag oer sette E 300 Adding Washer Fluid 2004 356 Additives Fuel llle 297 Air Bag ezaTaeicnesse Eg e eae Oda des 39 Air Bag Operation soa nea ans sad eden 42 Air Bag Warning Light 51 Driver Knee Air Bag 1 ee 43 Enhanced Accident Response 49 Event Data Recorder EDR 53 Front Alt Bag sou e eek ia Pr deed 39 If A Deployment Occurs llle 48 Knee Impact Bolsters 0004 43 Maintaining Your Air Bag System
9. Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next push the switch forward and release to Express Close Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Emergency Operation In case of electrical failure the sunroof can be operated with the hex wrench that is located in the glove box There is a plug located in the rear of the sunroof opening at the center of the vehicle Removing the plug reveals a hex opening in the motor assembly of the sunroof Insert the hex wrench and turn moving the sunroof to the desired location Sun Shade If Equipped For vehicles equipped with either a power sunroof or a fixed glass roof there is a sun shade that can be open or closed To open the sun shade push the tab and move the
10. ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description F85 30 Amp Green Rear Defroster F87 5 Amp Tan Rear Defroster F90 5 Amp Tan Heated Mirrors If Equipped VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 Disconnect the negative cable from the battery days you may want to take these steps to protect your battery started again e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service e g vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Bulbs Overhead Lamp Bulb Number C5W Courtesy Lamp W5W Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number Front Low and High Beam Headlamp HIR2LL Front Parking Daytime Running Lamps W21 5W Front Fog Lamps H11LL Front Side Marker Lamps W3W Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W Side Direction Lamps WYSW Rear Turn Signal Lamps PY21W Rear Side Marker Lamps W3W ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 Bulb Number Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Rear Tail and Stop Lamps P21 5W Rear Backup Lamps W16W W5W License Plate Lamps NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from yo
11. m 9 me 24 Exhaist Gases gritos re EX REL ERA ES PA 78 ll OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 26 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Important Safety Precautions 26 MIDE ap e niga EA ee eee Sais dd Seat Bell Selen ice xy 8 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside Supplemental Restraint System SRS 39 Child Restraints earna cet ee eens sole oes 55 E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The vehicle is supplied with a code card containing key code numbers to order duplicate keys and the autho rized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys The key fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter with an integrated key To use the mechanical key simply push the mechanical key release button Ignition Key Removal 1 Push the clutch pedal to the floor Bring the vehicle to a stop Apply the parking brake fully Place the shift lever into REVERSE gear oT A C N Turn the key to place the ignition switch in the OFF LOCK position 020274421 6 Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder Mechanical Key Release Button 7 Release the clutch pedal 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN WARNING Before exiting a vehicle always turn the ignition to the OFF LOCK position apply the parking brake shift the
12. tween the bottom and top lines marked COLD FILL RANGE As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac tory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle If engine coolant anti freeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freez ing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at a minimum of 50 OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum
13. while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN e Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck all wheels off position the ground If the ignition key is unavailable or the battery is CAU TION discharged refer to Shift Lever Override in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK e Do not use sling type equipment when towing Vehicle damage may occur in order to move the vehicle Continued EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337 CAUTION Manual Transmission e Vehicle can be flat towed all four wheels on the ground with the transmission in NEUTRAL DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with a conventional automatic transmission Damage to the drivetrain will result If these vehicles require Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated towing make sure all drive wheels are OFF the e Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck all wheels off ground the ground Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re quirements can cause severe transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered un der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe engine and or transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not cov ered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1 4L TURBO 341 lll ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC S
14. will flash on the display 4 Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button for setting 5 Briefly push and release the MENU button and day will flash on the display 6 Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button for setting NOTE The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each time the UP ZXor DOWN V button is pushed Push and hold the UP Aor DOWN button to increase decrease the setting rapidly Save the setting by briefly pushing the button when you approach the required setting Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings See Radio Repeat Audio Information With this function active the EVIC display shows infor mation relevant to the sound system e Radio tuned radio station frequency automatic tuning activation or AutoStore e CD audio CD MP3 track number To activate On or to deactivate Off the sound system info displaying proceed as follows 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button Push and release the UP ZXor Down V button to highlight See Radio and push and release the MENU button 2 Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button for setting 3 Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU button approximately one second to go back
15. 000 281 Tire Safety Information spees resori dirantai 261 Tire Service Kit zoe et gc EE XR wee 308 To Open Hood s ese wb eR gue 107 TOWING 20 2 on BONS ROS be eI DUREE 301 Disabled Vehicle 0000000 335 Recreational 4 eus bapa nee caress ass 302 Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome 302 Trach sashes fae t dev ea ed Seeker ore 244 en INDEX 423 Traction Conttol i4 sae Sanne e te 254 Trailer TOWNE ites Sena aie estere See eis 301 Transaxle Automatic at sesi seni Ari ee eee 11 Transmission uc nenene ASRS Xue GR RE v 368 Automate iz Goss e aoa EDU dk ws TR eR ass 233 Fluide eh ooo hed RT Gel n RE Y 368 Mahn al i653 dcs exea a Ya CE es 230 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 18 Transporting Pets 0 6 eee eee ee ees 76 Tread Wear Indicators llle 281 Trip Odometer llle 148 Turm Signals diae puer xc ERE eA 111 UCI Connectors 4 004044 oh bags ot whee anes 207 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 405 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector Unleaded Gasoline Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 34 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 7 Vehicle Loading ican eI 268 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vehicle Storage vus ober oa RR es 220 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description Warnings And Cautions sss sisien paa aeaa a 7 Warranty Information a eea a ea e a 4 Wa
16. 235 Gear Ranges sess snae ene g a a a ai ee 236 E AUTOSHOK oem E E S E 242 224 STARTING AND OPERATING M Op ration s secs o e e em een 242 ll DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES 244 Acceleration i 2 ke dee dre RR Cd 244 Jracton 125 ess ea sede Rs 244 ll DRIVING THROUGH WATER 245 Flowing Rising Water lesen 245 Shallow Standing Water 245 B POWER STEERING x I3 6 Ye n ede 247 E PARKING BRAKE yg cae oa ya y ERES 248 SPORT MODE verpxak yj ee tke es bee 250 Manual Transmission If Equipped 250 Automatic Transmission If Equipped 251 E BRAKE SYSTEM aad ate ER ERR Shine 252 E ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 252 Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS 252 Brake Assist System BAS 254 Traction Control System TCS i 254 Hill Start Assist HSA 0 0 255 Electronic Stability Control ESC 256 ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light 260 E TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 261 Tire Markings is ias dtp ac aedes eges 261 Tire Identification Number TIN 264 Tire Terminology And Definitions 266 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 267 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 225
17. 402 has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ME manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Ve
18. 6 500 km if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 395 Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip Check engine oil level Check windshield washer fluid level Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake master cylinder as needed Check function of all interior and exterior lights Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for required maintenance At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System Change oil and filter Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before the oil indicator sys tem turns on Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required Inspect brake pads shoes rotors drums hoses and park brake Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses Inspect exhaust system Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off road conditions 396 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES SS Maintenance Chart sisisisj sisisis sisisis si s Mileage or time passed whichever comes first e G2 ees oil ais oisS o s6 o o olo o o o cs5 a oo wD NN ol st oOo oOo RS eo o Ehe Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 sis
19. BLINKS 5 Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON Right Turn Light is ON SOLID Left Turn Light BLINKS 6 Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON Left Turn Light is ON SOLID Right Turn Light is ON SOLID 7 Turn Left Turn Signal Switch OFF Turn Signal Left Turn Light is OFF Right Turn Light is OFF Switch Must be placed in Neutral State 8 Turn ignition OFF 9 Turn Hazard Flashers OFF Manually System is now reset and the engine may be started en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 If a reset procedure step is not completed within 45 seconds then the turn signal lights will turn off and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful Air Bag Warning Light e The air bags must be ready to inflate for your ry protection in a collision The Occupant Re straint Controller ORC monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the ignition switch is in the OFF position the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately fo
20. CONTENTS B MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 394 Maintenance Chart 0 0004 396 3904 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Operating conditions such as frequent short trips trailer tow extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures and E85 fuel usage will influence when the Change Oil message is displayed Severe operating conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3 500 miles 5 600 km since last reset Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter vals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever comes first Severe Duty All Models Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles
21. Ch cks Safety isc saa atin dae dias er b a She e 77 Child Restraint 3 24 6 928 5 084 ace fea ede e Td 55 Child Restraints Booster Seats uve aep E ee 60 Child Restraints 0 0 0 0 00 cee eae 55 Child Seat Installation 00 73 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt 69 Infants And Child Restraints 58 Install A LATCH Compatible Child Restraint 68 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt c ue eae ese a ees ae ae eee 70 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children 63 Older Children And Child Restraints 59 Seating Positions Clean Air Gasoline 00 00000000 296 Cleaning Wheels pea ER ye he EG Re 372 Climate Control 0 0 00000 211 Clutch 4 492 sg epee 2 tia eed a Bee AUR 366 Clutch Fluid 4 ssa ad gai a aes ee bes RUA des 366 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 210 Compact Spare Tiesi csr l l 279 Connector UCI gi i due Ru ros i E e e E 207 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 207 Contract Seryice os isc al a aere Bea eA ane wad 402 Coolant Antifreeze suso rire ara Era 389 Cooling System i ei piee piire pa aaa 359 Adding Coolant Antifreeze sss 361 Coolant Level 00 002 eee eee eee 360 Disposal Of Used Coolant 364 Drain Flush And Refill 360 INSPECHON uu ede dere e dE Roe de Re Rok ERI ets 364 en INDEX 413 Points To Remember
22. ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 5 Air Bag Warning Light e This light will turn on for four to eight seconds ry as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 6 Park Headlight ON Indicator If Equipped F This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on 7 High Beam Indicator This light shows that the high beam headlights are on Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151 beam Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam If the driver s door is open and the headlights or park lights are left on the high beam indicator light will remain illuminated and a chime will sound 8 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s se
23. adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window LIFTGATE To unlock the liftgate use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or activate the power door lock switches located on the front door handles THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 To open the liftgate squeeze the liftgate release handle WARNING and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed Do not use the recirculation mode Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera Liftgate Handle ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Seat Belt Systems e Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Air Bags Child Restraints Important Safety Precautions Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passenger
24. audible and visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected ob stacle Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Rear Park Assist Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing arcs in one or more regions based on the obstacle s distance and location relative to the vehicle If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region the display will show solid arcs in the center rear region and will produce an audible alert As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle the display will show fewer arcs and the audible alert becomes more frequent es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 If an obstacle is detected in the left and or right rear region the display will show solid arcs in the left and or right rear region and will produce an audible alert As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle the display will show fewer arcs and the audible alert becomes more frequent Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when the transmission is placed into REVERSE an audible alert is activated The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle The pauses between the tones are directly proportional to the dis tance from the
25. components Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emis sions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage Riding the brakes may also reduce braking capacity in an emergency Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the Brake Warning Light is on Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir Fluid leve
26. en gine coolant antifreeze or any globally compat ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency the cooling system will need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 by an au thorized dealer as soon as possible Continued CAUTION Continued Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sa Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Manual Transmission If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR C635 DDCT MTX Transmission Fluid Automatic Transmission If Equipped Use only MOPAR AW 1 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Convertible Top Rails If Equipped We recommend you use Berulub FR 43 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
27. er s door handle is pushed when the key is in the in a location accessible to children A child could ignition operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Power Door Locks If Equipped A power door lock switch is incorporated into the driver door handle Push or pull the handle to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate If the driver s door handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on the driver s door handle indi Driver s Power Door Lock Handle cating locked when the door is closed the door will lock EE THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Autoclose POWER WINDOWS When enabled the door locks will lock automatically Power Window Switches Whee cu d MN QURE M UE js uh Tue There are single window controls located on the shifter rum auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled using bezel below the climate controls which operate the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC driver and passenger door windows The window con To change the Autoclose setting in the EVIC proceed as trols will operate when the ignition switch is in the follows ON RUN position sh am the display according to the previous cet iit flash on the display according to the previous set WARNING ting Never leave childr
28. the oversteer or understeer condition Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position STARTING AND OPERATING 257 ESC Off Switch Automatic Transmission ESC Off Switch Manual Transmission NOTE The ESC Off switch is located left of the steering column Manual Transmission Only 258 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent all accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro priate driver input for the conditions Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has three available operating modes Full On This is the normal operating mode for ESC Whenever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial
29. used under license by FCA US LLC Copyright 2015 FCA US LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION 6 326 375 5 tog n ure RUE RIS pa E coxa aca eo DE Bl Rare Peg Ld n e d SOS RC E 3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 0 cece cee R nn 9 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE eee ntn 83 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL eee rrt 141 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 53 21 53 ta Uer RR EG Eo a a e ec a e REOR d ORG d Nea ae aes 223 6 WHALE TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 9 a deor eg de Buds 9 Rec a ace Roe de EUR ICA PBR RECAP c 305 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ss 4 3 x62 3x e deed ox e reda 9 Se oe Eo See CERE e 339 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 545255964 eon o9 Be eed SEE eee ADAC NL RU ey Seas RAI eA ORC 393 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE eee ee eee eee e e 399 Em INDEX 5 513 xa boxe pu he Ra ak d Ro VR a a Erb once PERO Ud Rn a rx de OE aE d race A aka e 409 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS M INTRODUCTION 0000 4 Hi VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 7 ll HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 5 B VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS 8 M WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 7 4 INTRODUCTION EE INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle Be as sured that it represents precision workmanship distinc tive styling and high quality all essentials t
30. 2 Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Computer The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster It features a driver interactive display displays informa tion such as trip information range fuel consumption average speed and travel time Trip Button The TRIP button located on the right steering column stalk can be used to display and to reset the previously described values Ashort button push displays the different values Along button push resets the system and then starts a new trip E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 New Trip To reset Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the system manually When the Trip distance reaches 9999 9 miles or kilometers or when the Travel time reaches 999 59 999 hours and 59 minutes the system is reset auto matically e Disconnecting Reconnecting the battery resets the system NOTE If the reset operation occurs in the presence of the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B only the infor mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be reset Start Of Trip Procedure With the ignition on push and hold the TRIP button for over one second to reset Exit Trip To exit the Tri
31. 388 B FLUID CAPACITIES lesen 389 E FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARES tees era g dies Shite aig ene GUESS EON 390 Engine soari sca d etel doe osea d d 390 CHASSIS ker p e Ra Bases ARR aig 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1 4L TURBO 074844691 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Battery 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 6 Engine Oil Fill 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 4 Front Distribution Unit Fuses 342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fu
32. Damage or failures caused by the use of parts which are not quality equivalent to genuine parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehi
33. Economy Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Tread Wear Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor mal wear patterns and reduced tread life resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride 274 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door At least once a month Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket type pressure gauge Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated e Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a minimum of three hours The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed
34. Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster an audible chime will be activated and the Check left or right front rear tire xxx x psi text message will display when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information Check TPMS Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected and the Service Tire Pressure Monitor ing System text message will display If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 290 START
35. NOTE children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner s e http www tc gc ca eng roadsafety Manual and on all the labels attached to the child safedrivers childsafety index 53 htm restraint For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada s website for additional information Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size Height Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child re straint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have out grown the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Forward Facing Child Restraint with a five point Harne
36. Off for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch This mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired It is also intended for driving in deep snow sand or gravel conditions when more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction ee STARTING AND OPERATING 259 To turn ESC on again momentarily press the switch mode all TCS and ESC stability features are turned OFF again This will restore the normal ESC On mode of except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS operation section To enter the Full Off mode depress and hold the ESC OFF switch for five seconds After five seconds WARNING the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESC OFF message will display in the EVIC To turn When in Partial Off mode the TCS functionality of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in ESC ON again momentarily press the ESC OFF switch the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off WARNING Indicator Light will be illuminated When in Par tial Off mode the engine power reduction of TCS is disabled and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced Full Off This mode is intended for off highway or off road use only and should not be used on public roadways In this In the ESC Full Off mode the engine torque reduction and stabi
37. Pretensionets aces cac ate ad a RC iR 35 Rear Seats mu dE oS eon ee eS vg 29 Reminder l l 148 ne INDEX 421 Untwisting Procedure 000 34 SedlS c santi attic S cente RGN sarin vain ot is Sods omen 101 AGjUSIMENE iss eec xe ep nd eek 101 Heated 32 ken wade wa xac Rcx OR e don es 105 Selection OF OW enacted ERR ede Ae es 347 SENTRY KEY FCC General Information 0 4 15 Sentry Key Immobilizer 13 Service Assistance 0 6 ee ees 400 Service Contract 2 0 0 0 ee ee eee 402 Service Manuals 000s 404 Shift Lever Override llle 333 Shift Speeds Manual Transmission 232 Shoulder Belts llle 29 Signals TUM e coded pecho ES PERIERE 81 Snow Chains Tire Chains 04 284 SHOW Titse iu a eae Ke es PRG SORGE ER 277 Spare Tires ane d edere Cre bo e e etae 279 Spark Plugs qut trocar eet pete ette S ege 390 Specifications Ones sano ERE md cepe Gus i Re 347 Speed Control Cruise Control s lt res ssas ss 119 Sport Modes uxo sesa eh ak Saa e E pa ees 250 Starnes Te etae iia d E deed edt E 227 Automatic Transmission ss 227 Cold Weather ssec esa e des 228 Engine Fails To Start llle 229 Manual Transmission sss 227 Steering ROWED seid ed eem ra em ene P Ee EF RES 247 Tilt Columti os ssec e e RR n 118 Wheel Tilt icem eii RR x ERR rg 118 Steering Wheel Audio Con
38. SIRIUS subscription will not be able to be transferred to the new radio and will not be active when installed in the customer s vehicle CD Player Introduction This chapter describes the operation of the CD player only To operate the radio refer to the description in the Functions and Adjustments chapter 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se CD Player Selection To activate the CD player built into the equipment proceed as follows Load a CD with the equipment switched on The first track will start to play Or e If a CD has already been loaded turn on the radio and then briefly push the MEDIA button to select the CD function mode The last track listened to will start to play It is advisable to use original CDs to ensure optimal playing If CD R RWs are used we recommend using good quality media that are burned at the slowest speed possible CD Loading Ejecting To load the CD insert it gently into the slot to activate the motorized loading system which will position it cor rectly The CD can be loaded with the radio off and the ignition key turned to ON RUN In this case the radio will remain off When the radio is turned on the last source listened to before being switched off will be activated When a CD is inserted the display will show the symbol CD and the wording CD Reading They will remain displayed for the whole time required for the radio to read the CD When this time
39. TORQUE d Jump Starting Procedure 329 SPECIFICATIONS 240 neueg ered sade ys eee 319 B FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE iure 381 Torque Specifications llle 319 306 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Sx WM SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE 333 Automatic Transmission 00 336 ll TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 335 Manual Transmission 337 en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 307 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the radio Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers When the switch is activated all direc tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers Do not use this emergency warning system when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion On the highways slow down Incity traffic while stopped place th
40. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag WARNING Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label between you and the Side Air Bags the performance The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury Could be adversely affected and or objects could be during certain side impacts in addition to the injury Pushed into you causing serious injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABICs Located above the side windows The trim covering the SABICs is labeled SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG R 022635856 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Label Location SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts SABICs may reduce the risk of injuries in certain side impacts in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure The SABIC deploys downward covering the side win dows An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The SABICs inflate with enough force to in
41. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 045670103 Manual Temperature Control MTC The Manual Climate controls consist of a series of rotary dials and one inner push knob 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 1 Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the dial to the left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating to the right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures 2 Blower Control Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the 0 OFF position There are four blower speeds 3 Recirculation Control Rotate this control to change the system between recir culation mode and outside air mode Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present NOTE Continuous use of the Reci
42. acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system Brake Limited Differential BLD functions simi lar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode or Full Off mode Refer to Elec tronic Stability Control ESC in this section for further information Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop ona hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 2 5 manual transmission or 7 grade or greater automatic transmission grade hill Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle in NEUT
43. alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Never leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location acces sible to children Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Ina collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen gers are properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result To Open Push and hold the power sunroof switch rearward for approximately one second and the sunroof will stop at the vented position Push the switch a second time and hold for approximately one second and release the sunroof will open fully then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof To Close With the sunroof in the full open position pull the power sunroof button and hold it for approximately one second the sunroof will return to the vented position Pull the switch a second time and hold for approximately one second to completely close the sunroof 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M
44. anchor 5 Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufac turer s instructions 6 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child s reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of buckling it behind the child re straint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it Do not lock the seat belt Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re straint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when
45. and side window demister outlets Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix or Defrost even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pushed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary 5 A C Button Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation modes at the same time ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired push the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature Automatic Temperature Control ATC The Automatic Temperature Control ATC allows the occupant to select a comfort settings e The system provides set and forget operation for op timum comfort and convenience e The system can be controlled manually if desired The AIC system automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the occupant 0456043136 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 1 AUTO Temperature Control ATC Button Controls airflow temperature distribution and air recir culation automatically Push and release to select Per forming this function will cause the ATC to switch
46. and cold drivability ncreased risk for fuel system component corrosion MMT In Gasoline Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel 298 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE Pug Systm GRUHOMS CAUTION Continued CAUTION e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s Most of these products contain high concentrations performance e The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can
47. any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE D This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris tics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain or traveling into strong head winds use the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section for further information to select a lower gear Under these conditions using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup E STARTING AND OPERATING 241 If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits the transmission controller will expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating During cold temperatures transmission operation may be modified depending on engine coolant temperature Normal operation will resume once the engine tempera ture has risen to a suitable level Transmission Limp Home
48. back of the front NW 7 seat and next to your arm in the rear seat for vehicles gt equipped with a rear seat Grasp the latch plate and 413 A pull out the seat belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap e 7 Pulling Out The Latch Plate 3 When the seat belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 ux ug Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt 4 Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low 5 Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and across your hips below your abdomen To remove chest with minimal if any slack so that it is comfort slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder able and not resting on your neck The retractor will belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt plate and pull on the lap belt A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 6 To release the seat belt push the red button on the buckle The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a tw
49. between manual mode and automatic modes Refer to Automatic Operation for more information 2 AIC Button Push and release to change the current Air Conditioning A C setting Performing this function will cause the AIC to switch into manual mode 3 Temperature Control Up Button Provides temperature up control Push the button for warmer temperature settings 4 Blower Control UplDown Buttons There are 12 fixed blower speeds The blower control up down buttons regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed increases as you push or hold the blower control up button and decreases when you push or hold the blower control down button The blower fan speed may be set to any fixed speed by pushing the blower control up or down buttons The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the AUTO mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the following positions 5 Mix Mode D Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demister outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Performing this function will cause
50. cushion Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Overinflated or under inflated tires can affect ve satisfactory operation of your vehicle Four primary areas hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in are affected by improper tire pressure loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Tire Pressure e Safety and Vehicle Stability Economy e Tread Wear e Ride Comfort Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 WARNING Continued Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering NOTE Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Fuel
51. eee d pad d 245 Headlights cat etd eee ente ae n 109 Cleaning sessies essed ne ee SES YEAH S 375 SWATCH resa ESTESE d Eee ra Re 110 Heated Mirrors 0 0 0 eee 93 Heated SeatSis ccs acaead oe eGeead ee Meee ee G 105 Heater inene inana Ree eed eit s 211 Hill Start Assist llle 255 Holder Cups i eeiam Fae od tans oe E 136 Hood Release 1 2 llle 107 Ierittiot is acd uote eoe ye 9g Gans eels go 11 Key cicer a eR snn e EEE a DREE DREE ee s 11 Ignition Key Removal lees ess 11 Immobilizer Sentry Key 0006 13 Information Center Vehicle 0005 161 Instrument Cluster 1 2 2 0 0 0 02 e eee 148 Instrument Panel And Controls 143 Instrument Panel Cover 0000 375 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 376 Interior Appearance Care csar ccce lisse 374 Interior Lighting cci Rr t RR Res 112 Introduction i e eee repe PEE Gees ee 4 Jacking Instructions pees pensei mesasa 323 Jack Location 522 ta ua none UR E een 321 Jack Opera Om siiani p h ERR oe e gts 320 J mp Star ng eieaa e bee yu re bep E 327 Key In Reminder llle eee 13 Key Replacement llle 14 KEYS 5454 naw head Ct bbe TTTTIT 11 Key Sentry Immobilizer llle 13 Lane Change Assist e cbe oe v Edere en 112 Lap Shoulder Belts i2 eet RR 29 ne INDEX 417 Latehies acai ences wake Seana eave Ena ee ES ES 81 Hood ntes esee entree etre et eR i
52. enables the following operations Digital Audio Playback You can play all your digital audio files mp3 wma wav aac or play a customized playlist m3u or wpl format Audio File Selection By Category You can play all audio files of a certain category e g album artist or genre Playback Options While playing tracks you can select the following options Play Stop Next track Previous track Shuffle and Loop track 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE WARNING The media player does not support audio files com pressed with other formats and DRM Digital Rights Management protected audio files Non supported audio files that may be present on the USB device will be ignored Driving while distracted can result in loss of ve hicle control accident and injury It is strongly recommended that you use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take your focus off the road or your hands off the steering To use the media player you have to simply connect wheel Your primary responsibility is the safe op directly or by an extension lead your USB device to eration of your vehicle the center console USB port After turning the ignition e The use of any handheld device while driving is key to ON BLUE amp ME will start building your not recommended Use voice operated systems media library At the end of this operation you can surf when possible Follow all applic
53. fatal to you your passengers and others around you Continued WARNING Continued Before operating the power top make sure that no moving parts of the convertible top can injure a person or animal e Never place any extremities hands feet etc near the convertible top components the upper wind shield area the shelf area behind the rear seats or the convertible top stowage area while raising or lowering the convertible top e When using the power top button on RKE trans mitter if potential danger exists while lowering the top release the button immediately to interrupt the operation Only drive the vehicle with the convertible top completely closed and latched or fully lowered into its stowage compartment Do not operate the power top when the vehicle is in motion 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors and the liftgate The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key in Things To Know Before Starting for further information If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details Transmitter Battery Replacement NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may ap ply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate The recomm
54. has elapsed the radio automatically starts playing the first track Push the button with the radio turned on to activate the motorized CD ejection system After ejec tion the last audio source listened to before playing the CD will be heard ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 If the CD is not removed from the radio it will automati cally be reloaded about 20 seconds later but will not resume playing until the MEDIA button is pushed to select the CD mode The radio will switch to the last source prior to CD mode The CD cannot be ejected if the radio is off Possible Error Messages If the loaded CD cannot be read e g a CD ROM has been inserted or the CD is inserted the wrong way or there is a reading error the display shows the wording CD Disc error The CD will then be ejected and the audio source activated before the CD mode selection will be heard A CD which cannot be read will not be ejected until these functions are over At the end with the CD mode activated the display will show the wording CD Disc error for a few seconds and then the CD will be ejected Display Information When the CD player is operating information will ap pear on the display with the following meaning e Track 5 indicates the CD track number e 03 42 indicates the time elapsed since the start of the track if the relevant Menu function is activated Track Selection Briefly push the button to play the
55. ignition switch is turned ON Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously ESC The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the Electronic Stability Control ESC is partially OFF off STARTING AND OPERATING 261 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE Tire Markings e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H 2 e LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S piena v ve design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the 1 U S DOT Safety Standards 4 Maximum Load letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced 054903773 COME TIENE on ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades 262 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design emergency use only Temporary high pressure com stand
56. installing an infant or child restraint Child restraint anchorages are designed to with stand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor If it is locked the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor Refer to the Automatic Locking Mode description under Occupant Restraints for ad ditional information on ALR Lap Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 022669375 e ALR Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor e amp Top Tether Anchorage Symbol THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child re straint for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a for ward facing child restraint Weight
57. into manual mode 10 Temperature Control Down Button Provides temperature down control Push the button for cooler temperature settings NOTE If the temperature is lowered until Lo is dis played all high voltage Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning HVAC systems are deactivated and am bient air is circulated according to the Heating Ventila tion and Air Conditioning HVAC control settings es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 11 Climate Control ON OFF Button Push and release to turn the Climate Control ON or OFF 12 Recirculation Control Button Push and release to change the current setting The indicator illuminates when ON NOTE When in Defrost mode the Recirculation button will flash if pushed This indicates that you can not proceed to this mode due to fogging risk Climate Control Functions Air Conditioning AIC The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When in A C mode with the ATC set to a cool temperature dehumidified air flows through the air outlets If Economy mode is desired push the A C button to turn off the A C mode in the ATC display and deactivate the A C system NOTE e If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode the A C can be turned off but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows e If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and adjus
58. limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain on and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a pressure value highlighted in a different color After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a Service TPM System message and then display dashes in place of the pressure value For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a Service Tire Pres sure Monitoring System message and dashes in place of the pressure value Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it the TPMS will update automatically In addi tion the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Ope
59. limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a for ward facing child restraint up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passen ger seat Yes Contact between the front passen ger seat and the child restraint is allowed if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact Can the head restraints be re moved Yes Yes all may be removed Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR re tractor Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Pull on the webbing to ma
60. obstacle Pulses emitted in quick succes sion indicate the presence of a very close obstacle A continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than 12 in 30 cm away 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SS Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION Obstacle Distance An obstacle is present Audible signal dashboard loudspeaker within the sensors field e Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as the of view distance decreases Emits continuous tone at 12 in 30 cm e Adjustable volume level Refer to Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Visual signal EVIC e Arcs are shown based on the obstacle s distance and location relative to the vehicle Refer to Rear Park Assist Display for further information Failure Sensor or System failures Visual Signal instrument panel con appears on display Message is displayed on the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC where provided While audible signals are emitted the audio system is not muted The audible signal is turned off immediately if the distance increases The tone cycle remains constant if the distance measured by the inner sensors is constant If this condition occurs for the external sensors the signal is turned off after 3 seconds stopping warnings during maneuve
61. of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range CAUTION Do not overfill the engine with oil Overfilling the engine with oil will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This loss of oil pressure and increased oil temperature could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa tion NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever occurs first ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection for tur bocharged engines under all types of operating condi tions the manufacturer recommends synthetic engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12991 Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 40 full synthetic engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil f
62. on the steering wheel or the voice commands When you are travelling you can interact with BLUE amp ME by using the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands relevant only to phone functions LAST CALLS and PHONEBOOK and the media player To activate settings when travelling you can only use voice commands ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 The hands free kit enables the following operations e e Contact Calling By Voice you can call a contact in your mobile phone phonebook using your voice You can also call a contact in your phonebook by scanning through the entries on the multifunction display To use this option you have to transfer your mobile phone contacts to the hands free kit phonebook Digit Dialing By Voice you can dial a phone number by pushing the VR button on the steering wheel and speaking the digits to be dialed To Call The SMS Text Sender call directly the last SMS text sender or the sender of a message received and stored in the BLUE amp ME inbox To Answer A Call you can answer an incoming call by pushing the MENU Phone button on the steering wheel e Conference Call you can call another contact while you are engaged in a phone conversation with Bluetooth phones supporting this option Call Waiting while engaged in a phone conversa tion you can receive notification of another incoming phone call answer the other incoming phone call and s
63. or Metric km h U S Speed mph e Pushing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Metric Speed kmlh e Pushing the SET button once will result in a 1 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km h e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released then the new set speed will be established To Accelerate For Passing Push the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electroni
64. position Push and hold again for full close position NOTE Rail lubrication is recommended every 2000 cycles or if scratching noises due to dust are present Refer to Fluids Lubes and Genuine Part in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for information CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew on the top material Avoid high pressure car washes as they can dam age the top material Also increased water pressure may force water past the weather strips e Remove any standing water from the top and dry the surface before opening it Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior Continued 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME CAUTION Continued Use care when washing the vehicle water pressure directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to leak into the vehicle s interior WARNING The convertible top does not provide the structural protection that a reinforced metal roof does and the fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection of the occupants in a collision Therefore it is impor tant that all occupants wear their seat belts at all times Death or serious injuries could occur if you are ejected from the vehicle during a collision Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure If your power convertible top does not operate in th
65. rear seat passengers Pull upward on the release tether located on the outboard side of the seat back dump the seatback forward then slide the seat forward to allow access in and out of the rear seat 030964712 EZ Entry Lever Lift the seatback upright and push the seat rearward to its locked position once the rear passengers are seated Memory Feature Both front seats have a memory feature which can operate in two ways Memory Function Option 1 Full Seat Back And Track Fore Aft Position Memory After using the EZ entry function the seatback angle and the Track fore aft adjuster can both re lock into the position they were most recently adjusted to This is accomplished if the seat is moved fully rearward to its last fore aft position on the tracks before the seat back is returned upright ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Memory Function Option 2 Seat Back Only Push the switch once to turn on the heated Memory ay seats Push the switch a second time to shut the After using the EZ entry function the seat back may first heating elements off be returned upright prior to going back to the last T fore aft memory position on the tracks This results in doe E Once n heat setting is selected heat will be felt us the seat back memory being set only The track will then MIAO to ty minutes be locked forward of its last set fore aft memory posi WARNNG tion To then reset th
66. receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Adminis trator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 404 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor matio
67. response to impact events The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection In side impacts the Side Air Bags deploy independently a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions including some collisions at certain angles or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 compartment The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced Front Air Bags deploy Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes Occupants including children who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed Occupants including children should never lean on or sleep against the door side windows or area where the Side Air Bags inflate even if they are in an infant or child restraint Seat belts and child restraints where appropriate are necessary for your protection in all collisions They also help keep you in position away from inflating Side Air Bags To get the best protection from the Side Air Bag
68. shade to a full open position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 034235956 0440043699 Manual Sun Shade Power Outlet ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or START position Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug into the outlet for use To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position There is a standard 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlet located in the floor console for added convenience This power outlet can power mobile phones electronics and other low power devices 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watts 13 Amps power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty 034662413 Power Outlet Fuse Location Underhood F15 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Front Console ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not i
69. speed limits 260 STARTING AND OPERATING ME EXAMPLE Load Identification Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire e XL Extra load or reinforced tire or e LL Light load tire or e C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire
70. sport balls rafts or similar inflatable items However use only the Air Pump Hose 7 and make sure the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 4 6 mm diameter in the tread of your vehicle Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses 312 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1 4 6 mm or larger If the tire has any sidewall damage If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire If the wheel has any damage If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel Continued WARNING Continued Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat source A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided Failure to follow these warn ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Tak
71. system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experi ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e tis not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in this section of the manual ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Manual Operation The system allows for manual selection of blower speed air distribution mode A C status and recirculation con trol The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings A C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual operation Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Window Fogging Windows will fog
72. the ATC to switch into manual mode 6 Front Defrost Hy Push and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON Air comes from the windshield 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME and side window demist outlets When the defrost but ton is selected the blower level will increase Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting and defogging Per forming this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting 7 Floor Mode Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demister outlets Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 8 Panel Mode Air is directed through the outlets in the instru ment panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear 9 Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets Press and release the Panel mode button and Floor mode button to enter Bi Level mode the indicators illuminate when ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch
73. the new radio and will not be active when installed in the customer s vehicle To reactivate your service either call the number listed on the display or visit the provider online CAUTION Neither SIRIUS nor FIAT is responsible for any errors in accuracies in the SIRIUS data services or its use in vehicles es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc and its subsidiaries SiriusXM Radio requires a subscription sold separately after trial subscrip tion included with vehicle purchase Prices and program ming are provided by SiriusXM and are subject to change Subscriptions governed by Terms amp Conditions available at www siriusxm com customeragreement SiriusXM Radio U S service only available to those at least 18 years of age in the 48 contiguous United States D C amp PR Www siriusxm com Sirius Subscription Issues When Replacing A Sirius Radio When a radio needs to be replaced the Dealer will need the SIRIUS information to order a new radio even if the SIRIUS subscription has lapsed The ESN number con tains 12 digits The following are instructions for retrieving the Elec tronic Serial Number ESN from FIAT 500 NAFTA model radios To retrieve the ESN of SIRIUS Satellite Receiver Module tune to Channel 0 Make sure that when the order is placed the ESN are correct If any of the ESN numbers are not entered correctly then the
74. the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 279 rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install mor
75. to the main screen without storing the settings If the radio has BLUE amp ME refer to the appropriate BLUE amp ME Radio Supplement for further informa tion Speed Display When this function is activated the cluster will display the vehicle speed MPH or km h To activate On or to deactivate Off the speed display feature proceed as follows 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button Push and release the UP or DOWN V button to highlight Speed Display Push and release the MENU button to enter the Speed Display MENU 2 Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button to select display deactivation Off MPH or km h 3 Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU button approximately one second to go back to the main screen Autoclose With this function active the doors will automatically lock at when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h To change the setting proceed as follows 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button Push the UP Aor DOWN V button to highlight Autoclose Push and release the MENU button to enter Auto close MENU UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 2 Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button for setting 3 Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settin
76. top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram 4 Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap e If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or could injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the e
77. tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel bolts for tightness Check the tires for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for proper closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid if equipped or brake fluid leaks are suspected The cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP IF EQUIPPED Lowering The Power Top 5 Raising The Power Top 206 Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure Wind Stop B MIRRORS 4iiesa n ERST awk Re TG Inside Day Night Mirror 0 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped O Power Mirrors Folding Mirrors 100 pula tee ee eus 86 86 87 88 Heated Mirrors If Equipped SUM VISOLS amate bid Era obtentu E E 93 BLUE amp ME HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION 94 Blue amp Me Hands Free Communication Overview f Equ
78. turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF position to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi tion e When shifting into PARK press the lock button on the shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE R This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL N Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle 240 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for
79. vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when Torque Patterns operating the jack or changing the wheel After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts bolts are properly seated Continuen against the wheel ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 321 WARNING Continued Jack Location The jack and jack wrench tool are stowed in a bag under e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The the front driver s seat vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift e Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas 060535908 Jack And Jack Handle Location 322 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Preparations For Jacking Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear WARNING Soe Wheel 060505162 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoiding ice or slippery areas Do not attempt to change
80. volume levels To adjust the volume proceed as follows 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button Push and release the UP or DOWN V button then high light the Buzzer Volume Push and release the MENU button to enter the Buzzer Volume MENU 2 Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button for setting 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 3 Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Button Volume Button Volume Adjustment This function may be used to adjust the volume of the beep accompanying the buttons MENU UP Aor DOWN buttons can be adjusted according to 8 levels To adjust the volume proceed as follows 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button Push and release the UP AX or DOWN V button to highlight the Buzzer Volume push and release the MENU button 2 Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button for setting 3 Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Belt Buzzer Buzzer Activation For S B R Indication This function will only be displayed after a FIAT Group Automobiles dealership has deactivated the S B R sys tem Daytime Running Lamps DRL This function may be used to activate deactivate t
81. wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK P This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range ee STARTING AND OPERATING 237 When parking on a level surface you may shift the WARNING Continued transmission into PARK first and then apply the parking brake Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake shifting the transmission to PARK otherwise the load on pedal released Make sure the transmission is in the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi PARK before leaving the vehicle cult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the grade vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit RNING someone or something Only shift into gear when e Never use the PARK position a
82. 53 Air Bag Deployment 00000 39 Air Bag Light i600 te ea n n 51 Air Bag Maintenance 0 0s 53 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 348 Air Conditioner Maintenance 350 Air Conditioning aie siae RR Ue aod 211 Air Conditioning Controls 0 211 Air Conditioning Filter lille 351 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 219 Air Conditioning Refrigerant llus 350 Air Conditioning Syste cratera nds pE miraus 211 Air Pressure Tires naaa aaa aaa 274 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 00 360 Capacities 1d vadens etes haoc tile ose aed 389 Disposal a ade beh st rm eth e ho dh ed 364 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 0 252 Anti Lock Warning Light llle 148 Appearance Care cco ccsiceciscerisdea cesia 370 Automatic Dimming Mirror llle 90 Automatic Door Locks ills 23 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 214 Automatic Transaxle s i saesae nter eaaa e A 11 Automatic Transmission ee INDEX 411 Adding Fluid 2i oro RR RR res 369 Fluid And Filter Changes 0 370 Fluid Change 2 34 E Rb ERE REA Ee 370 Fluid Level Cheek sinceres e ER aan 369 Fluid Type actum ste SS dads 392 Gear Ranges s queens S dere RR deals 236 Special Additives scc te LR eei ERR 369 Autostick s ce dig ge Ree CHG ROS ES 242
83. A or V MP3 General Information Manual storing of 25 stations base radio and 40 stations if equipped with Satellite 15 on FM band i llowing functions Tene One HH QODUNISR sanctions 5 on FMA 5 on FMB 5 on FMC 10 on AM band 5 on Radio Section AMA 5 on AMB 15 on Satellite Band if equipped 5 e PLL tuning with FM AM bands Green On SCIES 0NSAN RBDS Radio Broadcast Data System e SPEED VOLUME function Customer selectable auto matic volume adjustment depending on the car speed a a NE e Automatic Stereo Mono selection FM Multipath detector ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 CD Section e Track selection forward backward e Fast forward rewind through tracks CD Display function display of track number and on mp3 discs song title artist and time elapsed since start of the track Playing Audio CD CD R and CD RW CAUTION On multimedia CDs besides audio tracks there are e data tracks too Playing this type of CD could cause hissing at a volume that could damage the speakers CD MP3 Section e MP3 Info function ID3 TAG e Folder selection previous next Track selection forward backward Fast forward rewind through tracks MP3 Display function display of folder name ID3 TAG information time elapsed since the start of the track name of the file Playing audio or data CD CD R and CD RW Audio Section Mute pause function Soft mute function Loudness function Grap
84. ARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING WARNING Continued e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or ages or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury child restraint e After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attach Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt ments Remove the child restraint before adjusting comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend the vehicle seat position When the vehicle seat has over the front of the seat when their back is against the been adjusted reinstall the child restraint seatback should use the seat belt in a rear seat Use this simple 5 step test to decide whether the child can use the Continued vehicle s seat belt alone Children Too Large For Booster Seats 1 Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 2 Do the child s knees bend comfortably over
85. Aor V ar Use the A or V buttons to scroll through the menu gh a He ie ENC Bicone teat ae manne SIMA functions To change the setting of the selected func tion use the or buttons The current status of the selected function appears on the display es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 The functions managed by the Menu are e Speech Volume e Aux Audio Offset e Radio Off e Sat ID e SiriusXM Telephone Number e System Reset e Speed Volume On Volume Limit Push the MENU button again to exit the Menu function Speed Volume Function If Equipped This function automatically adapts the volume level to the speed of the car turning up the volume when the speed increases to maintain the ratio with the noise level inside the passenger compartment To activate deactivate the function use the buttons The wording Speed volume appears on the display followed by the current status of the function e Off function deactivated Low function activated low sensitivity High function activated high sensitivity On Volume Limit This function makes it possible to activate deactivate the maximum volume limit when turning the radio on The display shows the function status e On volume limit on when the radio is turned on the volume level will be If the volume level is equal to or higher than the maximum value the radio will come on at the maximum volume 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUME
86. Battery iu bye eod eed ace E enses eig a 349 Jump Starting 6 6 6 eee 327 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 18 Belis Seat ses p E REY a SA OA CA E 79 Body Mechanism Lubrication 354 B Pillar Location 42er m enm em 267 Brake Assist System 00000000 254 Brake Fluid 2 20 oae ed ep Ote dba di 390 Brake Parking eee ree x ehem s 248 Brakes ge seet Seare ates Eee ETE 365 Brake System caderas em sees Sa eae 252 Anti Lock ABS sergeant essere ee 252 Master Cylinder 5 222 errenta atire cada 366 Patking x22 tne ebrei ede de 3 248 Warming Light eccess be So t etmis tes 148 Brake Transmission Interlock 00 235 Bulb Replacement 22s 224 4 5244 503445 444 384 Bulbs Light sse kr t nn 81 Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 389 Capacities Fluid isg gaia ieee i iada an a 389 Caps Filler Bide lice cce a wits cates eal Sie Am ERE a RATE A 300 Oil Engine occ see e e as 347 Carbon Monoxide Warning 78 Cargo Area Features oss 138 Car Washes aessa eG ay ace CAR RE EEG RUE eae 371 CD Compact Disc Player asesi ss serais 182 Cellular Phone sue RR ERR RES 211 412 INDEX M Chains Direccion oe re wi ac ede E Y es 284 Changing A Flat Tite mereci kasera or ea 320 Chart Dre Sizing 34e ddoer eh mr karire 262 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 148 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 77
87. Defrost Floor amp or Defrost HUMID CONDITIONS Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and do 64 Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear 9490 we Ea COLD DRY Set the Mode control to Floor If it s sunny you may want more upper air CONDITIONS In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level In very cold weather if you aes need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control to Defrost Floor z Defrost as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort 1382266 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS B STARTING PROCEDURES 1 55 Re 227 Manual Transmission If Equipped 227 Automatic Transmission If Equipped 227 Normal Starting dt rms 227 Cold Weather Operation 228 Extended Park Starting 228 If Engine Fails To Start secas essa tiie sans 229 After Starting 4 inc yao PERSE 230 O Turbocharger Cool Down 230 ll MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED 230 Five Speed Manual Transmission 230 Recommended Shift Speeds Downshifting pcssa deacra a noire nan E ll AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED y ibo ERO IR d endo BS s 233 Key Ignition Park Interlock 234 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 235 O Six Speed Automatic Transmission
88. ERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON Refer to Electronic Speed Control in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies if jump starting is required 26 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light yA This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running imme diate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN and remain 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 27 Oil Pressure Warning Light TH this light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when th
89. FF LOCK position wait five seconds to allow the starter to cool then repeat the Extended Park Starting procedure If the engine fails to start after eight attempts allow the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes then repeat the procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not continuously crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again If Engine Fails To Start WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury CAUTION Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle To prevent damage to the starter do not continu ously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again 230 STARTING AND OPERATING ME After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up Turbocharger Cool Down This vehicle is equipped with an after run pump to cool the turbocharger after the engine is shut off Depending on the type of driving and the amount of cargo the pump will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger Although the pump is rubber
90. HE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x mirror push the mirror select switch to either the L left Spotter Mirror If Equipped pris QU T Belet Ehe aes yo need adjust Some models are equipped with a driver s side spotter Using the mirror control switch push on any of the four mirror The spotter mirror allows for a greater range of arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to visibility on the driver s side of the vehicle move WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror 030436592 Spotter Mirror E UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Folding Mirrors The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage The mirror has three detent positions full forward normal and full rearward Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster if equipped Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Sun Visors The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the headliner near the fro
91. Hace Eum eene 111 To Resume Speed xcd aed gel eg 121 E UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 To Vary The Speed Setting 121 Pinch Protect Feature 00 0 132 To Accelerate For Passing 122 Wind Buffeting 0 0 0000006 132 ll REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED 123 Emergency Operation yesen onssas maa isa Rear Park Assist Sensors 123 Sun Shade If Equipped Rear Park Assist Warning Display 124 W ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS 133 Rear Park Assist Display 124 W CIGAR LIGHTER IF EQUIPPED 136 Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts 125 M CUPHOLDERS 0 0 136 Failure Indications 0000 127 M STORAGE iios rmm Rn 137 Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System 128 Glove Compartment 00 0 137 Park Assist System Usage Precautions 128 W CARGO AREA FEATURES 138 ll POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED 130 W REAR WINDOW FEATURES 139 To Op nz ceee Pea see a ru See LESS 131 Rear Window Defroster 139 To ClO Es cai ceti Mire te eles Wee tena ae Eng 131 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP IF EQUIPPED On vehicles equipped with a power convertible to
92. Hildren path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm LATCH Restraint System for the location of ap in any direction proved tether anchorages in your vehicle Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage OK oK 0226047162 WARNING Do not attach a tether strap for a rear facing car seat 1 Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage If there is no top to any location in front of the car seat including the seat frame or a tether anchorage Only attach the Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 tether anchorage for that seating position move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and where possible route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts If not possible lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint 3 Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting the
93. ING AND OPERATING BENE 3 Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact 4 spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not moni tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warn ing limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light and the Check Tire Pressure message will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System message will be dis played For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Unavailable message will be displayed Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as lo
94. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an autho rized dealer for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 20 Tachometer The tachometer indicates engine speed in Revolutions Per Minute RPM x 1000 21 Speedometer Trip Odometer Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Area This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading bef
95. JACKING s den Poe em i a eiaa goin 320 Jump Starting iue Serie RR enr Rod Ene dein E 327 TOWING iuc yw riere Pe ag erp b Rd 335 Emission Control System Maintenance 342 Engine Air Cleaner lees 348 Break In Recommendations 005 76 Checking Oil Level llle 346 Compartment esenea ede edm dann eae a 341 Cooling ats eb ado epp HERR he eta 359 Exhaust Gas Caution 0000000 eee 78 Fails To Start s a cu Rr he RESO 229 Flooded Starting llle 229 Fuel Requirements llle 295 jl 346 Oil Filler Cap iss e a b aea 347 OU Filter 22s ce eR oU hee 348 Oil Selection 4 5 494 0 gane deme aee ehe a 347 Overheating Starting wa oe ace x a ter ebd e x d ence altes 227 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 49 Euro Twin Clutch Transmission Fud Type ce cons bed RR IRE RR S 368 Event Data Recorder 0 0000 53 Exhaust Gas Caution llle 78 Exhaust System sesa 4s Rage d REA Rb e ea 78 Exterior Lights i23 29 uk Pic ea EEG 81 Filters Air Cleaner 2 5 22 49r dae 3 RR ES 348 Air Conditioning 000000 351 Engine Oil ce ice oe ke che eR eR Rees 348 Engine Oil Disposal llle 347 Flashers Turn Signal x3 a esegue exped quen 81 Flash To Pass llle 110 Flooded Engine Starting 205 229 Fluid Brake isse ER m RR Ree 392 ne INDEX 415 Fluid Capacities i a ax ems m hem aes 389 Fluid Leaks l l 81 Fluid
96. Level Checks Automatic Transmission 369 FUG Sai et edat o a PAULUS 390 Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 390 Fog Lights sse szecim ru REPRE RP EER 114 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 00 0 331 Fuels tse as oa die aa Sica RC VUESTRO 295 Adding 29 ee curp Se RES Ras 300 Additives 6 55 06 4046 4 504 24 eidem x 297 Capacity stcstswretaweteegie hr s 389 Clean Alt sd aces eats ani aced ead iE s 296 Filler Cap Gas Cap 2 6 0 0 ee eee 300 Gasoline sia 444 enhanc G6 3x e R RE RE as 295 Light sises m RESI Er Ee rs 148 Materials Added lille 297 Octane Rating i esed xa hb ne masasi s 295 Requirements adeps ene pa hie dean 295 Specifications ss ieis dcs ER en P8 Re Re ea 390 Tank Capacity xxu doro ee Bw PUR ea 389 Fueling s akaa en eraai E ge DARE RE 300 FUSES E EE aaah Be Dak Sa eh E E anes 377 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 00 300 Gasoline Clean Air 0 0 ees 296 Gasoline Fuel 1 0 llle 295 Gasoline Reformulated 0 000 5 296 Gauges Odometer 4 s4 444455 ed Ra ear Ep Rs 148 Gear Ranges So e yes da 9 epu E RACE 236 Gear Select Lever Override lusu 333 General Information 00 0000 e eee 295 General Maintenance 0 00000 ee ene 345 Glass Cleaning cersek oa ike oo a aide Ry ex ca 375 416 INDEX aaa Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising Or Shallow Stand ing Watera su ua doka oe oh Lach
97. Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illu minated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam aging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps Stop the vehicle Shift the transmission into PARK Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position 1 2 3 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation 242 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required AUTOSTICK AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control giving you more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you t
98. N RUN position If the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are buckled The driver should instruct all other occu pants to buckle their seat belts If an outboard front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 pets be restrained in the rear seat if equipped in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho rized dealer FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti vating BeltAlert NOTE If BeltAlert has been deactivated
99. NT PANEL ME e If the volume level is between the minimum and maximum values the radio will come on at the same volume as before it was switched off If the volume level is equal to or lower than the minimum value the radio will come on at the minimum volume On volume limit off The radio will come on at the same volume as before it was switched off The volume level can be between 0 and 40 Use the buttons or P to change the setting NOTE e Using the Menu it is only possible to adjust the activation deactivation of the function and not the minimum or maximum volume value If the battery charge is too low the volume cannot be adjusted between the minimum and the maximum level Radio Off Function This function makes it possible to set the radio switching off mode by choosing between two methods The chosen mode appears on the display e Radio off 00 min The radio turns off in connec tion with the ignition key the radio is turned auto matically off as soon as the key is turned to the STOP position e Radio off 20 min The radio turns off indepen dently from the ignition key the radio remains on for a maximum period of 20 minutes after the key has been turned to the STOP position System Reset Function This function is used to restore all settings to the factory values The options are e NO No restore intervention es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 e YE
100. R LOCKS The door locks can be manually locked or unlocked from inside the vehicle by using the door handle If the door handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on the door handle indicating locked when the door is closed the door will lock THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 WARNING Continued For personal security and safety in the event of a collision lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Before exiting a vehicle always turn the ignition to the OFF LOCK position apply the parking brake shift the transmission into REVERSE gear and remove the Key Fob from the vehicle When leav ing the vehicle always lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Driver s Door Lock Handle e Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is 021835847 dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Continued Continued 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Sx ud af dee m WARNING Continued vehicle the doors will automatically unlock if the driv Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or
101. RAL manual transmission vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear 256 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for brak ing the vehicle Disabling Enabling HSA If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion Electronic Stability Control ESC The Electronic Stability Control ESC system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteering or understeering condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to deter mine the vehicle path intended by the driver and com pares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
102. RC e Steering Wheel and Column e Knee Impact Bolsters e e Supplemental Side Air Bags e Supplemental Knee Air Bag e Front and Side Impact Sensors 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 022640267 12 years or younger including a child in a rear Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations facing child restraint 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle 2 Passenger Knee Impact Bolster with a rear seat 3 Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Driver Knee Impact Bolster ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors or other system components The first stage inflator is
103. S The default parameters will be restored Dur ing such operation the wording Resetting appears on the display At the end of the operation the source does not change and the previous situation will be displayed Radio Tuner Introduction When the car radio is turned on the last function that was selected before turning it off Radio CD CD MP3 AUX is activated To select the Radio function when another audio source is being listened to briefly push the TUNER button Once the Radio mode has been activated the display will show the name RBDS stations only or the frequency of the selected radio station the frequency band selected e g FMA and the preset button number e g P1 Frequency Band Selection With the Radio mode active press the FM or AM tuner button briefly and repeatedly to select the desired recep tion band Each time the button is pressed the following bands are selected cyclically AM FM or SAT if equipped Each band is highlighted by the corresponding wordings on the display The radio will be tuned to last station selected on the respective frequency band Preset Buttons The buttons numbered from 1 to 5 are used to set the following pre selections e 15 in the FM band 5 in FMA 5 in FMB 5 in FMC e 10 in the AM band 5 in AMA 5 in AMB 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e 15 in SAT if so equipped 5 SATA 5 SATB 5 SATC To listen to a preset station selec
104. S TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE within five seconds to unlock all doors and the liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first push of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information Opening Power Top Remote Function The remote keyless power top function can only be used with the engine off 0213069251 Key Fob NOTE The remote keyless power top function can be used to open the power top to the spoiler position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Opening Power Top Remote Function 1 OPEN Push and hold the unlock button down on the key fob for a minimum of three seconds to initiate Power Top Open The roof will stop opening when ever the unlock button on the key fob is released or when it reaches the spoiler position NOTE If your power convertible top does not open with the remote please refer to the Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information WARNING Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or
105. TING AND OPERATING SPORT MODE Manual Transmission If Equipped In Sport mode the engine is more responsive to the throttle pedal and provides more maximum torque by increasing turbo boost pressure Steering feedback is improved and steering effort is slightly higher This driving mode is useful for spirited driving 1 To activate the Sport mode press the SPORT button SPORT Button Once activated a SPORT message will be displayed in the instrument cluster 2 Momentarily release the accelerator pedal 3 Press the accelerator pedal again to activate STARTING AND OPERATING 251 Automatic Transmission If Equipped The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the driver with slight increase in effort and changes the transmis sion shift schedules for more aggressive shifting This driving mode is useful while driving on twisty roads where more steering precision is desired in spirited cornering 1 To activate the Sport mode press the SPORT button SPORT Button Once activated a SPORT message will be displayed in the instrument cluster 2 Press the SPORT button again to return to the standard driving mode 252 STARTING AND OPERATING ME BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability the remaining system will still func tion However there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness You may n
106. TURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 CAUTION LIGHTS Multifunction Lever To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi The multifunction lever located on the left side of the mately 6 inches 15 cm and then drop it This should steering wheel controls the operation of the headlights ENS secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless headlight beam selection passing light and turn signals the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged NOTE The external lights can only be turned on with the ignition in the ON RUN position WARNING Headlights Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open Rotate the end of the multifunction lever up when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision ZO ward to the first detent for headlight operation Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 031410253 Headlight Operation NOTE When the headlights are turned on the Daytime Running Lights will be deactivated High Beams Z With the low beams activated push the multi function lever towards the instrument panel to turn on the high beams Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel to turn off the high beams Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the mult
107. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type a tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain EI mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride C Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or e E unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being a performed The suggested rotation method is the rearward cross 05070712 shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern Tire Rotation does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed 286 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold tire pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will de crease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer
108. Usage Precautions NOTE e Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the rear bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist system operating properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of Rear Park Assist Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The Rear Park Assist system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper Objects such as bicycle carriers etc must not be placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing a failure indication to be displayed in the instrument cluster ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 CAUTION WARNING e Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is Drivers must be careful when backing up even unable to recognize every obstacle including small when using the Rear Park Assist system Always obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily de check carefully behind your vehicle look behind tected or not detected at all Obstacles located you and be sure to check fo
109. V button for setting Briefly push and release the MENU button and min utes will flash on the display 7 Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button for setting NOTE The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each time the UP ZXor DOWN V button is pushed Push and hold the button to increase decrease the setting rapidly Save the setting by briefly pushing the button when you approach the required set ting Briefly push and release the MENU button to return to the Time sub function When accessing the Mode submenu briefly push and release the MENU button The previously set display format will flash on the display e Push and release the UP A or DOWN v button to select 24h or 12h ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 When you have selected the required settings briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the Time Mode sub menu screen or push and hold the MENU button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Set Date This function may be used to set the date day month year To change the date proceed as follows 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button Push and release the UP ZX or DOWN V button to highlight Date push and release the MENU button and Year will begin to flash 2 Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button for setting 3 Briefly push and release the MENU button and month
110. YSTEM OBD II 342 ll EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS sseeese e e nn 342 W REPLACEMENT PARIS 3 4 28008 y ERR e 344 B DEALER SERVICE euer RR Rn 344 E MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 345 H Engine Oil ere este eee et RR 346 Engine Oil Filter llle 348 Engine Air Cleaner Filter llus 348 Maintenance Free Battery 349 Air Conditioner Maintenance 350 Body Lubrication 0 0000 Windshield Wiper Blades Adding Washer Fluid Exhaust System 0 000000000 Cooling Systemi nce se e en Brake System 1 0 6 eee eee eee 365 Manual Transmission If Equipped 368 Automatic Transmission If Equipped 368 340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Appearance Care And Protection From COFTOSIODn ds ebore es rtr Re pups 370 ll FUSES Interior Fuses Underhood Fuses llle 380 B VEHICLE STORAGE 25 2299 cues e ax 383 B REPLACEMENT BULBS xxix kcu En 384 B BULB REPLACEMENT s 4 404040404 shes 385 Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam 385 Front Turn Signal Parking And Daytime Running Lamps Front Fog Lamps e e aas 387 Front Rear Side Marker Lamps 387 Rear Tail Stop Backup And Turn Signal Lamps Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL
111. a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle the road to avoid the danger of being hit when While the vehicle is being jacked operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers 3 Set the parking brake 4 Place the shift lever in REVERSE 5 Turn Off the ignition EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 323 Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle e Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised e Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Continued WARNING Continued Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely s
112. able laws that may the complete library and scroll its categories as re affect the use of electronic devices while driving quired using the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands BLUE amp ME will then play your selection Continued via the car sound system ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 WARNING Continued WARNING e Koop iie Ownere Slama ii the a when kept in e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or the car the Owner s Manual will be available for outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in you dad other Users Patania with the system these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Please make certain that before using the system for the first time all persons have access to the E f e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your Owner s Manual and read its instructions and vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the using a seat belt properly vehicle safety information carefully SEATS Forward Rearward Adjustment The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats near the floor 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat whil
113. alfunction Indicator Light MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station 344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the de signed performance
114. an the head restraints be re moved Yes Yes all may be removed THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Locating LATCH Anchorages found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback below the anchorage sym bols on the seatback They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion amp The lower anchorages are round bars that are 0226074888 LATCH Anchorages Locating Tether Anchorages 4 There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee LATCH compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage Forward facing child restraints and some rear facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage Center Seat LATCH WARNING This vehicle does not have a center seating position Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to install a child seat in the center of the back seat Always follow the
115. and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealer have the E YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 401 facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer They want to know if you need assistance If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con cern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center e Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealer name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage FIAT Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 1 888 242 6342 FIAT Canada Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 1 800 465 2001 English Phone 1 800 387 9983 French Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
116. ansmission or in Gear manual transmission and place the ignition in the OFF position 4 Set the parking brake B Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit 1 Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to the Sealant Mode position Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire 314 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 4 Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 onto the valve stem 5 Uncoil the Power Plug 8 and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet NOTE Do not remove foreign objects e g screws or nails from the tire C Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire e Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire Service Kit NOTE Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL e After pushing the Power Button 4 the sealant white fluid will flow from the Sealant Bottle 1 through the Sealant Hose 6 and into the tire NOTE Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire If the sealant white fluid does not flow within 0 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Push the Power Button 4 to turn Off the Tire Service Kit Disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem Make sure the valve stem is free of debris Reco
117. any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of the seat belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Continued WARNING Continued Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision The seat belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body without twists If you can t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle e A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect will not p
118. ards and it begins with the tire diameter molded pact spare tires have the letter T or S molded into into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT the sidewall preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Example Size Designation P215 65R15XL 95H 215 65R15 96H LT235 85R16C T145 80D18 103M 31x10 5 R15 LT P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards or blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards or LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards or T or S Temporary spare tire or 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 235 145 Section width in millimeters mm 65 85 80 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire or 10 5 Section width in inches in EN STARTING AND OPERATING 263 EXAMPLE R Construction code R means radial construction or D means diagonal or bias construction 15 16 18 Rim diameter in inches in Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted
119. arning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The parking brake ee STARTING AND OPERATING 249 WARNING Continued Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Continued failure and a collision Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave a manual transmis sion in REVERSE or first 1st gear Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately 250 STAR
120. asoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicator Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart ex ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle WARNING Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinati
121. at was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types 278 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Run Flat Tires If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles 80 km at 50 mph 80 km h after a rapid loss of inflation pressure This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of or below 14 psi 96 kPa Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi ately A Run Flat tire is not repairable It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor mation Spare Tires If Equipped NOTE For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire please refer to Tire Service Kit in What To Do In Emergencies for further information CAUTION Because of
122. at belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the seat belt reminder light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BEEN 9 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part need towing see your authorized dealer for service as of an onboard diagnostic OBDII system soon as possible E M EC E trol system If the vehicle is ready for emissions CAUHON testing the light will come on when the ignition is first Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator turned on and remain on as a bulb check until the Light MIL on could cause damage to the engine engine is started If the vehicle is not ready for emissions control system It also could affect fuel economy and testing the light will come on when the ignition is first driveability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic turned on and remain on for 15 seconds then blink for 5 converter damage and power loss will soon occur seconds and remain on until the vehicle is started If the Immediate service is required bulb does not come on during starting have the condi tion investigated promptly WARNING If this light comes on and remains on while driving it suggests a poten
123. ature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pres sure value CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system op eration or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS sensor to become inoperable After using an after market tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to your local dealer to have your sensor function checked After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPM sensor 288 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provi
124. ay Information ID3 Tag Information Display In addition to the information relating to the time elapsed folder name and file name the radio is also capable of displaying ID3 TAG information relating to Title Track Artist and Author When one of the ID3 TAG pieces of information is chosen to be displayed Title Artist Album and this informa tion has not been recorded for the track played the text UNKNOWN will be displayed for that field 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Selection Of Next Previous Folder Push the A button to select a next folder or the V button to select the previous folder The display will show the number of the folder The folders are selected cyclically The first folder is selected after the last folder and vice versa If no other folder track is selected in the next two seconds the first track on the new folder will be played After the last track in a folder is played the next folder will be played Structure Of The Folders The radio with MP3 player Recognizes only the folders that effectively contain MP3 format files e If the MP3 files on a CD ROM are structured in sub folders their structure is compressed to a single level structure where the sub folders are taken to the level of the main folders Troubleshooting General Sound Volume Low The Fader function should be adjusted to the values F front only to prevent the reduction in radio output power and the cance
125. ay a graphic show ing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure tire highlighted in a different color 292 STARTING AND OPERATING 10 37 am 05 31 2012 low pressure 055874193 Low Tire Indicator Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will sound a chime and also display a Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System message in the EVIC for approxi mately 5 seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received 10 37 am Ty 05 31 2012 5 Z Q service tire pressure monitoring system 19345 mi 87 F Service TPM System Message If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash and the Service Ti
126. bnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam Cooling System age Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition WARNING when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis motion connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature vehicle controlled and can start at any time the ignition Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires SIR IS ae CUN pasion disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearanc
127. bove idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK WARNING e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued 234 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the number of reasons A child or others could be parking brake shift the transmission into PARK seriously or fatally injured Children should be turn the engine OFF and remove the ignition key warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal Once the key is removed the transmission is or the transmission gear selector locked in PARK securing the vehicle against un Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle wante
128. c Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up e g during a parking maneuver Refer to the Park Assist System Usage Precautions for the limitations of this system and recommendations The Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the transmission is placed into REVERSE Rear Park Assist Sensors The four Rear Park Assist sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles in the horizontal direction from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 55 in 140 cm from the center of the rear fascia bumper and up to 24 in 60 cm from the corners of the rear fascia bumper depending on the location type and orientation of the obstacle 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN If several obstacles are detected the Rear Park Assist system indicates the nearest obstacle The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corresponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that would clear the underside of the car during the parking maneuver Rear Park Assist Warning Display The Rear Park Assist Warning screen is located within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC It provides
129. ce Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle 300 STARTING AND OPERATING ME ADDING FUEL CAUTION Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap us e Damage to the fuel system or emission control The gas cap is located on the passenger side of the system could result from using an improper fuel vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the filler cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting aftermar ket cap can cause the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling Fuel Filler Cap E STARTING AND OPERATING 301 WARNING Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled Never add fuel when the engine is running It may cause the MIL to turn on and could cause a fire A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e W
130. ce a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle When hav ing the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer The VIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit ter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 020274421 Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice 16 THING
131. cessing the Temperature submenu briefly push and release the MENU button Either F or oC will appear on the display according to the previous setting 4 Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button for setting 5 Briefly push and release the MENU button to return to the Tire Pressure PSI KPA sub menu es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 When you have made the required settings briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the sub menu screen or push and hold the MENU button approxi mately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Language Selecting The Language The messages can be displayed in the following lan guages Italian English Turkce Nederlands Spanish French Dutch Polish Brasilian To set the required language proceed as follows 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button to highlight Language Push and release the MENU button to enter the Language MENU 2 Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button for setting 3 Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Buzzer Volume Adjusting The Failure Warning Buzzer Volume With this function the volume of the buzzer accompany ing any failure warning indication can be adjusted to one of eight
132. cle Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Starting And Operating for further infor mation Once the vehicle has been freed push the ESC Off switch again to restore ESC On mode least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 1 Turn the engine OFF 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Remove the shift lever override access cover located on the right side of the shift lever housing by prying l6 at the bottom edge of the cover 334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Shift Lever Override Access Hole 061536004 Push and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool into the access hole and push and hold the ov
133. cle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter vals Do not use chemical flushes in these compo nents as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission or air conditioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunc tion use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure 346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is approximately five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and approximately five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range mark ings on the dipstick The safe range is indicated by a crosshatch zone Adding 1 quart 0 9 Liters of oil when the reading is at the low end
134. cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfuncti
135. commended cold tire inflation pressures STARTING AND OPERATING 267 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door Example Tire Placard Location B Pillar Example Tire Placard Location Door 268 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire And Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF qu anos e SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX KG QR TIRE FRONT SPARE ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE PI9S7ORT4 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 COLD TIRE SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 Total weight your vehicle can carry 3 Tire size designed for your vehicle 4 Cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual ee STARTING AND OPERATING 269 NOTE Under a maximum l
136. condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm CAUTION Direct contact of air fresheners insect repellents suntan lotions or hand sanitizers to the plastic painted or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause permanent damage Wipe away immediately CAUTION Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 CAUTION Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol based and or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats as damage to the seat may result Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
137. conscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate rear doors open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Continued WARNING Continued e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the sea
138. ct an authorized dealer Interior Fuses The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control Module BCM and is located on the driver s side under the instrument panel Fuse Panel Cavity Vehicle Fuse Number Mini Fuse Description 1 F12 7 5 Amp Brown Right Low Beam 2 F32 5 Amp Tan Front and Rear Ceiling Lights Trunk and Door Courtesy Lights 3 F53 5 Amp Tan Instrument Panel Node ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 Cavity Vehicle Fuse Number Mini Fuse Description 4 F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Door Locking 5 F36 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Socket Car Radio Climate Control System 6 F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi Directional Washer 7 F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Window 8 F13 7 5 Amp Brown Left Low Beam Headlamp Leveling 9 F50 7 5 Amp Brown Airbag 10 F51 5 Amp Tan Car Radio Switch Climate Control System Stop Light Clutch 11 F37 5 Amp Tan Stop Light Switch Instrument Panel Node 12 F49 5 Amp Tan Exterior Mirror GPS Electric Mirror Parking Sensor 13 F31 5 Amp Tan Ignition Climate Control 14 F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Window 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Underhood Fuses The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of the engine compartment next to the battery To access the fuses press the release tabs and remove the cover 072710794 Front Distribution Unit The ID number of the electrical component correspond ing to
139. d off 0351043126 Front Cupholders ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 For rear passengers there are cupholders located on the STORAGE floor between the front driver and passenger seats Glove Compartment The glove compartment is located on the right side of the instrument panel Pull outward on the glove compart ment latch to open the glove compartment Push the glove compartment door upward to close it T j wn N ss ENENR NI L Rear Cupholders 035135891 Glove Compartment Latch 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CARGO AREA FEATURES The rear seatbacks have a fold down feature to allow increased cargo capacity Push down the release button located at the outboard top of the seatback and move the seatback to its folded down position to provide a flat load floor cargo area When returning the seatback to its upright position push rearward until the seatback is properly latched d Z 0354015374 Rear Seat Release Buttons ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Folded Rear Seats 0354015375 REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located in the center of the instrument panel below the radio Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster An indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically t
140. d movement or in a location accessible to children A child When leaving the vehicle always remove the igni could operate power windows other controls or tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle move the vehicle Continued Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK OFF key removal position The key can only be re moved from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK OFF position and once removed the transmis sion is locked in PARK Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied To shift the transmission out of PARK the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Six Speed Automatic Transmission The transmission gear position display located in the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK Refer to Brake Transmission Shift Inter lock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position STARTING AND OPERATING 235 The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission e
141. d or high heat conditions it may use Recir culation A C mode to provide additional comfort while in automatic mode Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstruc tions Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air using the high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the air conditioning system is started again UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 Operating Tips Chart WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS and turn on A C Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise VERY HOT Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle set the Mode control to Recirculate with A C on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level zi with A C on If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel and turn on A C If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control to Bi Level with A C on Adjust Temperature control for comfort COOL OR COLD Set the Mode control to
142. de warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System l This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the instrument cluster The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to maintain the proper pressure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 The TPMS consists of the following components Receiver Module Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring
143. ding water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami nated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee STARTING AND OPERATING 247 POWER STEERING The electric power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving If the electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing assist you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually WARNING Continued operation with reduced or no power steer ing assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as pos sible If the Steering icon is flashing it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for service It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance If the Steering icon is displayed and the POWER STEER ING SYSTEM OVER TEMP message is displayed on the EVIC screen they indicate that extreme steering maneu vers may have occurred which caused an over tempera ture condition in the power steering system Once driv ing condit
144. directions of the child restraint manu facturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here To Install A LATCH Compatible Child Restraint If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR seat belt stow the seat belt following the instructions below See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt to check what type of seat belt each seating position has 1 Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages 2 Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat 3 Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat ing position 4 If the child restraint has a tether strap connect it to the top tether anchorage See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for direc tions to attach a tether
145. distance from the window lights are on 12 Rear Fog Light Indicator If Equipped 154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 14 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the Anti lock Brake System reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Control ESC system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp corneri
146. doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to fric tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a contact wil chemicals They am not permanen ar BENESSERE contact with chemicals They are not permanent and WARNING normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot significantly within a few days or if you have any protect you in another collision Have the air bags blistering see your doctor immediately Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the air bags will not be in place to protect you Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 WARNING Continued seat belt pretensioners and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme diately Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well NOTE Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any collision the v
147. down longer the levels will change quickly Balance Adjustment Proceed as follows 1 Push the AUDIO button 2 Push the A or V button to set Balance in the AUDIO menu 3 Push the 4 button to increase the sound from the left speakers or the button to increase the sound from the right speakers By pushing the or buttons briefly the levels will change progressively By pushing them down longer the levels will change quickly Select the value 0 to set the right and left audio outputs at the same level Fader Adjustment Proceed as follows 1 Push the AUDIO button 2 Push the Aor V button to set Fader in the AUDIO menu 3 Push the 4 button to increase the sound coming from the rear speakers or the button to increase the sound coming from the front speakers ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 By pushing the or amp buttons briefly the levels will change progressively By pushing them down longer the levels will change quickly Select the value 0 to set the right and left audio outputs at the same level Loudness Function If Equipped The Loudness function improves the volume of the sound while listening at low volumes increasing the bass and treble To activate deactivate this function select the Loud ness setting in the AUDIO menu The condition of the function on or off is shown on the display for a few seconds by the wording Loudness On or Loudness O
148. dwoofer speakers one speaker in each of the front doors Two 22 mm diameter tweeter speakers one speaker in each of the front pillars Two 100 mm diameter full range speakers one speaker in each of the rear side panels Antenna on the car roof Radio with CD MP3 player ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 With Alpine Premium Audio system if equipped e Antenna on the car roof Two 165 mm diameter midwoofer speakers e Radio with CD MP3 player Two 11 mm tweeter speakers in the front pillars With BEATS Premium Audio system if equipped e Two 100 mm full range speakers one speaker ineach A subwoofer in the trunk on the left hand side panel of the rear side panels e An amplifier in the trunk on the right hand side panel Quick Guide Radio Controls BUTTON GENERAL FUNCTIONS MODE O On Short button push Off Short button push TUNER AM FM SAT if equipped source Short repeated button push selection 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME BUTTON GENERAL FUNCTIONS MODE A B C Cycles A B C presets for AM FM Short repeated button push SAT if equipped MEDIA CD AUX Media Player if equipped Short repeated button push and present source selection BUTTON GENERAL FUNCTIONS MODE x Mute Pause Volume activation deactivation Short button push Button Mute Pause AUDIO Audio adjustments low tones Menu activation short button
149. e Auto Opening Closing mode automatically opening closing to the one quarter open and three quarter open comfort stops or if the remote keyless power top function is inoperable or if the trunk lid does not open the following relearn procedure may be necessary 1 Confirm that the door trunk lid are closed 2 Begin with the top in the fully closed position using manual mode 3 Hold the OPEN button to move the top to the fully open position 4 CONTINUE to hold the OPEN button for an addi tional three seconds 5 Release the OPEN button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 6 Hold the CLOSED button to move the top to the fully closed position 7 CONTINUE to hold the CLOSED button until the top begins to cycle fully open then release the CLOSED button At the end of step 7 the top will automatically cycle to the fully open position and then close to the 1 4 open position This will confirm that the relearn procedure was success ful Auto Open Close will now be functional Trunk lid operation will be functional Remote Keyless Power Top Function will be functional NOTE DO NOT interrupt this activity If the power convertible top does not relearn repeat the procedure a second time Wind Stop The Wind Stop installs in the backseat area of the vehicle The Wind Stop will not interfere with power top opera tion Therefore it can remain installed when the top is up MIRRORS Inside Day Ni
150. e the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill NOTE Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains visible sediment have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant antifreeze conforming to MS 90032 Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Coolant Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 CAUTION CAUTION Continued Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not damage and may decrease corrosion protection be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and Organic Additive Technology OAT en
151. e care never to scratch the paint Stone and gravel impact The most common causes are e e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing Insects tree sap and tar that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish Salt in the air near seacoast localities CAUTION Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants e e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials Washing such as steel wool or scouring powder that will e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve scratch metal and painted surfaces hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with can result in damage or removal of paint and decals clear water 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Special Care e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well If drive on salted or dusty roads or if you dri e you rive e r dus y E TIL y u drive packaged and sealed near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider e Tt is important that the drain holes in the lower edges ud or stone shields behind each wheel of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as open possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of y
152. e care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair eyes or clothing Tire Service Kit is harmful if inhaled swallowed or absorbed through the skin It causes skin eye and respiratory irritation Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin Change clothing as soon as possible if there is any contact with clothing Continued EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 313 WARNING Continued e Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex In case of an allergic reaction or rash consult a phy sician immediately Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of children If swallowed rinse mouth imme diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water Do not induce vomiting Consult a physician immediately Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit A Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit 1 Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle s Hazard Warning flashers 2 Verify that the valve stem on the wheel with the deflated tire is in a position that is near to the ground This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses 6 and 7 to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding Place the transmission in PARK auto tr
153. e driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt Recline Adjustment Adjusting Bar While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar and move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once the desired position is reached Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched The recline adjustment lever is located on the inboard side of the seat To recline the seatback lift up the recline lever lean back until the desired position has been reached and release the lever Recline Lever WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Seat Height Adjustment The driver s seat height can be raised or lowered by using a lever located on the outboard side of the seat Pump the lever upward to raise the seat height or pump the lever downward to lower the seat height 0309027383 Height Adjuster 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M EZ Entry Feature The driver and front passenger seats have an EZ entry feature for
154. e emissions and im prove air quality The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended Prop erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im proved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 Ethanol Methyl Tert Butyl Ether MTBE and Ethyl Tret Butyl Ether ETBE Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION Do not use gasoline containing Methanol or E 85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non Flex Fuel Vehicles FFV are compatible with gaso line containing up to 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim ited Warranty ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms Operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on Poor engine performance Poor cold start
155. e engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 28 Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion The engine coolant temperature indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further information ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster 0409043146 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 The EVIC consists of the following e System Status Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Outside Temperature Display Trip Computer Fu
156. e fill hole and a point not more than 3 16 inch 4 7 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Please see your authorized dealer for service Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri cant has become contaminated with water NOTE If contaminated with water the fluid should be changed immediately Automatic Transmission If Equipped Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life Use only the manufacturer s specified transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications It is important to maintain ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant should be used CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmiss
157. e fore aft track memory feature to WARNING reestablish Memory Function Option 1 the seat has to be returned fully rearward to its last fore aft memory track position as described in Memory Function Option 1 Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus Heated Seats If Equipped tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time On some models the front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks The controls for the front heated seats are located on the center instrument panel area Continued 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad WARNING Continued Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface tempera ture of the seat Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head re
158. e than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the 280 STARTING AND OPERATING ME front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Si
159. e transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system 308 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se WARNING Continued CAUTION to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime When safe pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at TIRE SERVICE KIT IF EQUIPPED idle Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the Small punctures up to 14 6 mm in the tire tread can be pointer drops back into the normal range If the sealed with Tire Service Kit Foreign objects e g screws pointer remains on the H red mark for more than a or nails should not be removed from the tire Tire Service minute turn the engine off immediately and call for Kitcan be used in outside temperatures down to approxi service mately 4 F 20 C Thi
160. each fuse can be found on the back of the cover ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description F01 60 Amp Blue Body Controller F02 20 Amp Yellow Audio Amplifier F03 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Switch F04 40 Amp Orange Anti Lock Brake Pump F05 70 Amp Tan Electric Power Steering F06 20 Amp Yellow Radiator Fan Single Speed F06 30 Amp Green Radiator Fan Low Speed F07 40 Amp Orange Radiator Fan High Speed F08 40 Amp Orange Blower Motor F09 10 Amp Red Powertrain F10 10 Amp Red Horn F11 15 Amp Blue Powertrain F11 10 Amp Red Powertrain Multiair If Equipped F14 5 Amp Tan High Beam Shutter F15 15 Amp Blue Cigar Lighter 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description F16 7 5 Amp Brown Transmission F17 25 Amp Clear Powertrain Multiair If Equipped F17 15 Amp Blue Powertrain F18 15 Amp Blue Powertrain F18 5 Amp Tan Powertrain Multiair If Equipped F19 7 5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning F20 15 Amp Blue Heated Seats If Equipped F21 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump F22 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain F23 20 Amp Yellow Anti Lock Brake Valves F24 7 5 Amp Brown Stability Control System F30 15 Amp Blue Fog Lamps F82 30 Amp Green Sunroof Convertible Top F83 20 Amp Yellow Cooling Pump If Equipped F84 10 Amp Red Transmission
161. eaes Rex eris 166 Tp Buttons sal ne aen este REPRE 166 Trip Functions assena areae a e ate aes 168 0 Values Displayed x 24 463 eee eee 168 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features oe ego ERR eS Ces EEG 169 142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME E SALES CODE RAB RADIO 4e atre 182 Wi iPod USB MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL IF Introduction ics see em dee es wads 182 PITRE BD rani He ike ita pacte d opa rrr EMEN 182 BISPTOERENITVELEELUACIDHCECK NITSCUS micans i i Technical Specifications issu 184 Rahs OUSINUOI ead ap quatn iue qid reci d uic E eere PILREILLSR Per eid 185 CD Player Operation 0 0 209 General Information 0 188 eee s EAD 7 dA ind 210 Functions And Adjustments 190 E CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE 210 Radio s i4gue e e REA Pa uei S 197 E RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES 211 PANE USUS SiS gene spun 195 W CLIMATE CONTROLS craro re Cesare KT 211 CD Players ii te tng ai ERU ee dp 201 Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 211 GEMES ERY cee fiene qup vie dd As Automatic Temperature Control ATC 214 Troubleshooting s sers ccarr diener na 206 Operating Tips TOE eee 219 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 040164828 1 Side Vent 7 Passenger Air Bag 13 Storage Com
162. east 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated push the Defla tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes 1 Push the Power Button 4 to turn off the Tire Service Kit 2 Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle 1 and place the sticker on the instru ment panel 316 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 3 Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage location Quickly proceed to D Drive Ve hicle CAUTION The metal end fitting from Power Plug 8 may get hot after use so it should be handled carefully e Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 can result in sealant con tacting your skin clothing and the vehicle s inte rior It can also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service Kit components which may cause D Drive Vehicle Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire drive the vehicle 5 miles 8 km or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire Do not e
163. eed Setting To Increase Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under standing Your Instrument Panel for more information The speed increment shown is dependent on the selected speed unit of U S mph or Metric km h U S Speed mph e Pushing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Metric Speed kmlh e Pushing the RES button once will result in a 1 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km h 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e If the button is continually pushed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established To Decrease Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can de crease speed by pushing the SET button The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped Refer to Under standing Your Instrument Panel for more information The speed decrement shown is dependant on the selected speed unit of U S mph
164. ehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys tem perform the following functions Cut off fuel to the engine Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF posi tion Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position Unlock the doors automatically System Reset Procedure Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn signal lights located in the instrument panel cluster may both be blinking and will continue to blink until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road you must follow the system reset procedure 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Customer Action Customer Will See 1 Turn ignition OFF Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State 2 Turn ignition ON Left Turn Light is OFF Right Turn Light BLINKS 3 Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON Right Turn Light is ON SOLID Left Turn Light BLINKS 4 Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON Left Turn Light is ON SOLID Right Turn Light
165. eight or height allowed by their convertible child seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE ST
166. el economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration C For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343 Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is noton when 2 As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine NOTE If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over position you will see the M
167. elt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Pretensioner The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a seat belt system wi
168. en unattended in a vehicle and do 2 Push the or button for setting not let children play with power windows Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a 3 Briefly push the MENU button to go back to the menu location accessible to children Occupants particu screen or push and hold the MENU button approxi Jarly unattended children can become entrapped by mately one second to go back to the main screen the windows while operating the power window without storing the settings switches Such entrapment may result in serious Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC injury or death in Understanding Your Vehicle for further information f gt P Power Window Switches Auto Down The driver s door window switch has an Auto Down fea ture Push the window switch for approximately one second release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open
169. ended replacement battery is CR2032 1 Push the mechanical key release button and release the mechanical key to access the battery case screw lo cated on the side of the Key Fob 020274421 Mechanical Key Release Button THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 2 Rotate the screw located on the side of the Key Fob 3 Take out the battery case Remove and replace the using a small screwdriver battery observing its polarity 021441822 021336637 Key Fob Screw Location Battery Case Removed 4 Refit the battery case inside the Key Fob and turn the screw to lock it into place 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios DOO
170. er to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate decklid sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mecha nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid us
171. erride release lever in Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL Reinstall the shift lever override access cover EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service Towing Condition Wheels OFF The AUTOMATIC TRANS MANUAL TRANSMIS Ground MISSION SION Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED If transmission is oper able e Transmission in NEUTRAL e 65 mph 104 km h max speed Wheel Lift Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Front OK OK Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD 336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent CAUTION Continued When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose following equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers towing or associated brackets State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper Automatic Transmission If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc e Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated
172. es 107 Lead Free Gasoline secco je aw eR em 295 Leaks El dd 2x aede UR de amp 8A oe wee ee 81 Lite Of DI68 acer zr EU US ERR P YS 282 Liftgate Sed n x iai kane sce aerarii dep cs 24 Light Bulbs er 6 00 4 ristagna S356 G008 we ES 81 lighis occ eco mk e ena 81 Aur Bap uus e e ae a ei aci ende Bes aes 51 Antihlock is ees e ag e ee eed 148 Brake Assist Warning llle 260 Brake Warning 6 6 6 eee gintas s 148 Bulb Replacement 000 385 Check Engine Malfunction Indicator 148 Engine Temperature Warning 148 Exterior sk sa ive 3e ee px aaa eed eee 81 FOS pm 148 High Beam ce es tee caw Oed eee eA 110 High Beam Indicator lille 148 LOW Fuel iuter tained Bad d ae er tee 148 Oil Pressure ces kG es ald e RR aree ORTA Es 148 Patkoud ed erea PSOE S EP S xp 110 Seat Belt Reminder llle 148 SOEVICE Lon dite sb pope wu d ph OQ EN RUP EP dus 385 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 148 Traction Control cerce prirent ere ren ees 260 Turn Signal cesme deeadiana edge 81 Voltage arire memos f RR Ao Be T EN 148 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 148 Loading Vehicle Tirs ue er ns e Beh a GS Beh a ae ha R 267 Locks Automatic Door 0 0 0000 aaa 23 DOOF 24 dun n patiuna h a na E EH URS 20 Power DOOR i i e Rr awa Re hae ee GS 22 Lubrication Body sesegera kessu eee 354 Lug Nuls 2a i erineda saaa boe BS ache ios 319
173. factory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Routine fluid and filter changes are not required However change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated with water etc or if the trans mission is disassembled for any reason Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 What Causes Corrosion e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of and Tar Remover to remove paint and protective coatings from your vehicle Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation your paint finish Tak
174. ff Preset User Classic Rock Jazz Functions If Equipped The built in equalizer can be activated deactivated When the equalizer function is off the audio settings can only be changed by adjusting the Bass and Treble settings whereas when the function is on the acoustic curves can be adjusted To deactivate the equalizer select the EQ Preset function in the audio menu To activate the equalizer use the AUDIO button to select one of the adjustments e EQ User adjustment of 7 equalizer bands that can be changed by the user e Classic equalizer preset for optimal classic music sound 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e Rock equalizer preset for optimal rock and pop 5 On the display a seven bar graph will appear in which music sound each bar represents a frequency Select the bar to be adjusted by using the 4 or amp buttons The selected bar will start to flash and it can be adjusted using When one of the equalizer adjustments is activated the A or V buttons wording EQ Bones 6 To store the setting push the MENU or AUDIO Jazz equalizer preset for optimal jazz music sound User EQ Settings Function If Equipped buttons To set a personalized equalizer adjustment Menu 1 Push the AUDIO button MENU Button Functions 2 Use the A or V buttons to set EQ function Push the MENU button briefly to activate the Menu function 3 Use or P buttons to select EQ User
175. first second or third To disengage AutoStick mode return the shift lever to the Sean Slabs out inisecond or Mid por cnbe help DRE position You can shift in or out of the AutoStick hi ird Pie a E Select second d ues position at any time without taking your foot off the Ee gear after the vehicle 1s brought to a stop tap the shift accelerator pedal lever rearward once or twice The system will ignore shift commands that would WARNING cause engine lugging or overspeed An audible beep will sound if an inappropriate gear is requested Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their e Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or because the transmission will not shift automatically personal injury 244 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow we
176. first submenu option Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button by single pushes to scroll through all the submenu options 4 the displayed submenu option and to open the rel evant setup menu Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button by single pushes to select the new setting for this submenu option Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the new setting and go back to the previously selected submenu option Push and hold the MENU button to return to the main menu short hold or the main screen longer hold Change Engine Oil Indicator System Change Engine Oil Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Change Engine Oil message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily push and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indica tor system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position do not start the engine
177. fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 and return the hose to its storage area located on the bottom of the air pump Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the vehicle WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 319 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug nuts bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before Proper lug nut bolt torque is very important to ensure P po q Dy UP tightening that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting vehicle the lug nuts bolts should be torqued using a the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles properly calibrated torque wrench Torque Specifications Lug Nut Bolt Torque Lug Nut Lug Nut Bolt Size Bolt Socket Size 66 Ft Lbs 90 N m M12 x 125 17 mm Steel Wheels Only 75 Ft Lbs 100 N m Aluminum Wheels Only 0605005441 Wheel Mounting Surface 320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME Tighten the lug nuts bolts in a star pattern until each nut bolt has been tightened twice WEENING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING IF EQUIPPED WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
178. g your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle e Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Manual Transmission If Equipped Apply the parking brake place the shift lever in NEU TRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting the vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlock ing ignition system It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor Automatic Transmission If Equipped The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine Depress the brake pedal before shifting to any driving gear NOTE You must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK Normal Starting NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal 228 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Turn the ignition switch to the AVV ACC START position and release it when the engine starts If the engine fails to start wi
179. ge Symbol ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child re straint for using the LATCH an chorage system to attach the child restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs 29 5 kg Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint No Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Can two child restraints be at tached using a common lower LATCH anchorage No Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchor ages use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passen ger seat Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact See your child re straint owner s manual for more information C
180. ght Mirror The mirror can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate NOTE This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the driver s door trim panel 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never Power Mirror Switches spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean The power mirror controls consist of a mirror select switch and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a 92 UNDERSTANDING T
181. gine cool ant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en gine coolant antifreeze or any globally compat ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling 4 dding Coolant g Coolan system in an emergency the cooling system will need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 by an au coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 that al thorized dealer as soon as possible lows extended maintenance intervals This engine cool ant antifreeze can be used up to ten years or Continued 150 000 miles 240 000 km before replacement To pre vent reducing this extended maintenance period it is may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M important that you use the same engine coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology OAT engine coolant antifreeze that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan dard MS 90032 When adding engine coolant antifreeze e We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Fo
182. gs Units Set Units This function may be used to set the measurement unit in y three submenus Distance Temperature and Fuel Economy and Tire Pressure To set the required unit proceed as follows 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button Push and release the UP AA or DOWN V button to highlight Units Push and release the MENU button to enter Units MENU 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2 Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button to navigate the three sub menus Select the required sub menu and then briefly push and release the MENU button When accessing the Distance submenu briefly push and release the MENU button Either mi or km will appear on the display according to the previous setting Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button for setting Briefly push and release the MENU button to return to the sub menu When accessing the Fuel Economy submenu briefly push and release the MENU button Either mpg km l or 1 100km will appear on the display according to the previous setting If the distance unit set is mi the fuel economy unit will be displayed in mpg If the distance unit set is km the fuel economy unit will be displayed in either km l or 1 100km 1 Push and release the UP A or DOWN v button for setting 2 Briefly push and release the MENU button to return to the sub menu 3 When ac
183. hat are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers The Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for maintaining its validity The range of additional services available to FCA US LLC customers NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine parts and cares about your satisfac tion ee INTRODUCTION 5 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section iT contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects
184. he When the doors are locked with the Key Fob the lights switch is in the center position or that the lights are will turn off off to avoid draining the battery ENS Interior Light Timing On Right Position Interior Light Timing Center Position 8 g e When all doors are closed a 15 minute timer is There are four different modes of operation that can be activated activated in this position NOTE The timer is deactivated when the key is moved e When one door is opened a three minute timer is into the ON RUN position activated When the key is removed from the ignition within two minutes of the ignition being turned off a 10 second timer is activated 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Front Fog Lights If Equipped Push the switch once to turn the front fog lights on Push The fog light switch is located on the center stack of the i a a RO Hien he EUTEIOR Nene DUE instrument panel just below the radio WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper washer lever is located on the right side of the steering column NOTE The windshield wipers washers will only oper ate with the ignition in the ON RUN position Fog Light Switch en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Front Windshield Wiper Operation Windshield Wiper Off There are five different modes of operation for the front This is the normal position of the wiper lever windshield wipers The windshield wiper
185. he Daytime Running Lamps Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button Push and release the Up ZX or DOWN V button to highlight Daytime Running Lamps DRL Push and release the MENU button to enter the DRL MENU 2 Briefly push and release the MENU button On or Off will flash on the display according to previous setting 3 Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button for setting 4 Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings GSI Gear Shift Indicator This function may be used to set the Gear Shift Indicator in two submenus Fuel Econ On and Fuel Econ Off Fuel Econ On turns on a fuel economy upshift light in the instrument cluster for optimum fuel economy when operating in base driving mode UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 Fuel Econ Off the fuel economy upshift light is disabled To set the required unit proceed as follows 1 2 3 5 Briefly push and release the MENU button to display the two sub menus Push and release the UP Aor DOWN V button to navigate the two sub menus Select the required sub menu and then briefly push and release the MENU button Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button for setting Briefly push and release the MENU button to re
186. he Program Type will change to the next category and the radio will then tune to first station in that program type Pushing lt or amp buttons will tune to only the stations in that program type Pushing the A or V buttons until All is displayed will allow normal tuning to all stations 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME The Program Types available are All Pop Rock Electronic Dance Hip Hop R amp B Country Christian Jazz Standards Classical Latin World Sports Enter tainment Talk News NPR Comedy Family amp Health Religion Traffic Weather You can find the SiriusXM current terms and conditions at www siriusxm com Re Subscribe To SiriusXM Satellite Radio New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with their radio Following expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re subscribe Press the UP DOWN button to scroll through the Menu Functions and the Left Right button to change the selected Set up Menu function Write down the Electronic Serial Number ESN for your receiver To retrieve the Electronic Serial Number of SiriusXM Satellite Receiver Module tune to Channel 0 Make sure that when the order is placed the ESN are correct If any of the ESN numbers are not entered correctly then the SiriusXM subscription will not be able to be transferred to
187. he same type vented over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Continued 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion e If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be fore connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail req
188. heel Hands Free Buttons 1 Mute ESC 2 Phone Menu 3 Phone Hang Up 4 Voice Recognition VR 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME To get started with BLUE amp ME hands free kit with voice recognition you have to simply pair your Bluetooth wireless technology enabled mobile phone with the system Pairing is an operation that has to be made only once NOTE e During the mobile phone pairing procedure BLUE amp ME attempts to detect a phone equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology within range and then establishes the connection using a Personal Iden tification Number PIN Once your phone is paired you have the option to transfer your mobile phone contacts to the hands free kit to make a phone call either by using the contacts list or directly pronouncing the phone number to answer a call and also to answer another incoming phone call To interact with BLUE amp ME you can use either the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands With voice recognition you can perform system func tions by speaking voice commands also identified as keywords When the system recognizes a keyword it will respond with the appropriate action Voice recognition is an easy and convenient way to use BLUE amp ME All the system functions are available within the BLUE amp ME Main Menu When the car is not moving you can scroll through the complete menu by using either the buttons
189. hen opening one of the front doors the EVIC display will turn on the clock and the miles or kilometers covered for versions markets where provided for a few seconds 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Setup Menu The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a cycle Push and release the UP A and DOWN V but tons to access the different options and settings setup The setup menu can be activated by pushing the MENU button A single push on the UP Aor DOWN V but tons will scroll through the setup menu options The menu includes the following functions e Speed Beep e Trip B Data e Set Time e Set Date e See Radio Speed Display Autoclose Units Language Buzzer Volume Button Volume Daylights D R L Hill Start Tire Pressure Unlock Driver Door First Unlock All Doors Exit Menu UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without 3 Briefly push and release the MENU button to select Submenu 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button to select the main menu option to set Push and release the UP AA or DOWN V button by single pushes to select the new setting Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the new setting and go back to the main menu option previously selected Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Sub menu b Briefly push and release the MENU button to display the
190. hen the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened e If the gas cap is not tightened properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel has been added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improperly installed or damaged If the system detects a malfunction the gASCAP message will display in the odometer display Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off TRAILER TOWING Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended 302 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission Flat Tow NONE Transmission in NEU NOT ALLOWED TRAL Dolly Tow Front OK OK Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL OK OK
191. hic 7 band equalizer if equipped Separate bass treble tone adjustment Right left channel balancing Front rear fader 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Functions And Adjustments Turning The Car Radio On The car radio comes on when the ON OFF button is pushed briefly When the car radio is turned on and the on volume limit is on the volume is limited to a setting of five even if it had been set higher when previously used Turning The Car Radio Off Push the ON OFF button to turn the radio off Selecting The Radio Functions By pushing the TUNER button briefly and repeatedly the following audio sources can be selected cyclically e AM FM and Satellite Bands if equipped Selecting The CD Function By briefly pushing the MEDIA button the CD audio source can be selected only if a CD is loaded Volume Adjustment To adjust the volume push the buttons Vol or Vol to increase decrease the volume Mute Pause Function Push the amp button briefly to activate the MUTE func tion The volume will gradually decrease and the wording TUNER Mute will be shown on the display in radio mode or CD Pause in CD mode Push the amp button again to deactivate the MUTE function The volume will gradually increase until it reaches the previously set level E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 When the volume level is changed using the dedicated controls the Mute function is deactivated and the v
192. hicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 403 WARNING Engine exhaust internal combustion engines only some of its constituents and certain vehicle compo nents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of compo nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of FCA USA LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA
193. hicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air Continued 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcemen
194. ifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will turn on the high beams until the lever is released Parking Lights To turn on the parking lights remove the key or turn the ignition to OFF LOCK position and turn on the headlights 200 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped To activate the Daytime Running Lights DRL rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol NOTE The low beams and side taillights will not be on with DRL If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was purchased the DRL function can be turned on or off using the display menus Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Turn Signals Push the multifunction lever upward to signal a right turn or downward to signal a left turn The correspond ing indicator in the instrument cluster will blink to indicate the operation of the turn signal 031410254 Turn Signal Operation NOTE The indicators will automatically turn off when the turn has been completed and the steering wheel is returned to a straight position 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off Follow Me Home Headlight Delay When this feature
195. ild in a rear 8 Do not lean against the door or window If your facing child restraint vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the e Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space with a rear seat between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured Seat Belt Systems 9 If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be Buckle up EYED though you are an excellent driver EYE modified to accommodate a disabled person contact On short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided and could cause a collision that includes you This can under If You Need Assistance happen far away from home or on your own street 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert amp BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front passenger if equipped with out board front passenger BeltAlert to buckle their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or O
196. iller cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Materials Added To Engine Oil Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engi neered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type dispos able oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfi
197. ilter 1 4 Liter Turbo Engine 4 Quarts 3 8 Liters Cooling System 1 4 Liter Turbo Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 4 6 Quarts 4 4 Liters 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula with Manual Transmission 1 4 Liter Turbo Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 5 8 Quarts 5 5 Liters 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula with Automatic Transmis sion 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 90032 Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W 40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12991 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Fuel Selection 87 Octane Acceptable 91 Octane Recommended ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 CAUTION Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool ant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT
198. impair engine per formance and damage the emissions control sys tem of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions control overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or System can result in civil penalties being assessed against some light smoke your engine may be out of tune You or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser vice Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Continued WARNING Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Continued tenan
199. ing the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as neces sary Rear Wiper Blade Removal Installation 1 Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward this will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the liftgate glass MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 072607741 1 Wiper Arm 2 Pivot Cap NOTE The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully up ward unless the pivot cap is raised first 2 Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate glass 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it 4 Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade holder 1 Wiper Blade 2 Blade Pivot Pin 3 Wiper Arm 4 Wiper Blade Holder ape Wav 072607742 holder at the end of the wiper arm and firmly press the wiper blade until it snaps into place 5 Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into place Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compa
200. ion Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions Routine fluid level checks are not required therefore the 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M transmission has no dipstick Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc tion visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked Operating the ve hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage CAUTION If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your autho rized dealer immediately Severe transmission dam age may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid And Filter Changes Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will provide satis
201. ions are safe pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon and message turn off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion If the Steering icon is displayed and the SERVICE POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF message is displayed on the EVIC screen they indicate the vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for service Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 248 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE Even if the power steering assistance is no longer operational it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort especially at low speeds and during parking maneuvers If the condition persists see your authorized dealer for service PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave the manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear The parking brake lever is located in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely 0746042713 Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the MAR ACC ON RUN position the Brake W
202. ipped ssaber 300865 ey Res 94 The Hands Free Kit llle 95 SEATS os ara casino UR en eens 101 O Forward Rearward Adjustment 101 Recline Adjustment 0 0 102 Seat Height Adjustment 103 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x EZ Entry Feature 1 46 eR ER e 104 Lane Change Assist ctae d cesat 00000005 112 Memory Feature 0000 eee 104 Follow Me Home Headlight Delay 112 Heated Seats If Equipped 105 Interior Lights sese 112 Head Restraints llle 106 Front Fog Lights If Equipped 114 E TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 107 Bi WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS 114 B LIGH S epp CE RAO EOS ee hee GS 109 Front Windshield Wiper Operation 115 Multifunction Lever llle 109 Rear Windshield Wiper 117 Headlights 3 1 42 5226 eR e s iiime 109 Mi TILT STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED 118 High Beams au ces dees Pace xS a qq 110 B ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL 119 Elash Io Pas8 5 sese eace re ORC RE E en 110 lo Activate 05 25 neg rr xS 120 Parking Lights 23 5s oo aes wie ole es 110 To Set A Desired Speed illus 120 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 111 To Deac vate seg RR Exe Reus 121 Tune Signals cer erre
203. is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time Activation Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF LOCK position and pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel within two minutes Each time the lever is pulled the activation of the lights will be extended by 30 seconds The activation of the lights can be extended to a maximum of 210 seconds Deactivation Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel and hold it for more than two seconds Interior Lights The interior light switches are located in the overhead console The interior lights can be set to three different positions Off Left Position Center Position On Right Position Using the switch on the left overhead push the switch to the right from its center position and the lights are always on Push the switch to the left from its center position and the lights are always off Leave the switch in the center position and the lights are turned on and off when the doors are opened or closed The switch on the right side of the overhead console controls the map or reading function of the lights Push the switch to the right to turn on the right light and push the switch to the left to turn on the left light ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 CAUTION When the doors are unlocked with the Key Fob a 10 second timer is activated Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that t
204. isisisi 8s 8 s s 8s 8 8 8 8 Or Kilometers ejsi sjsi spe e s eie s e e ese alolelolo N eis o o anulyo yrisa oe T o oor J 2 2 alala Additional Inspections Inspect the CV joints X X X X X Inspect front suspension tie rod ends boot seals and replace if necessary 2 X X A x X x Inspect brake linings replace if needed X X Inspect parking brake function adjust as neces X X sary Additional Maintenance Replace cabin air conditioning filter X X X X X X X Clean and lube sun roof tracks XX X X X X X XxX X X X X X X EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 397 elsisisisisisis S 8 88 8 S8 2 3 3 8 8s8 8s8 81 6 o oP oP o o6 Mileage or time passed whichever comes first 2 2 29 9 2919 29 295 5l l S l l Sl lS e e e e e e e e e Q e lo Ni ol tl o ol nr co o ty Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 sisisisisi s s s si8s s s s s Or Kilometers elsi sjsispe e ss eie e e eye ssissssusszisessz eo c o loopI r p T T a N N Replace engine air filter X X X X X Replace the spark plugs X X X X X Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever comes X X first Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary X Replace the timing belt X The spark plug change interval is mileage based only yearly intervals do not a
205. isted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 inches 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu pant it must be removed en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if when worn the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant s body is LESS than 6 inches Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision Only use the Seat B
206. ith both voice commands or buttons on the steering wheel This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules subject to the following two conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept all interference received in cluding interference that may cause undesired opera tion ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 The Hands Free Kit The basic characteristic of this hands free kit is voice recognition with Bluetooth wireless technology With this system you can make and receive calls safely and securely by using either voice commands or buttons on the steering wheel This can be done under any driving condition without ever having to take your eyes off the road or remove your hands from the steering wheel as required by current laws Bluetooth wireless technology enables wireless connec tion between your mobile phone and the hands free kit installed on your car To use the hands free kit you need a Bluetooth wireless technology enabled mobile phone This hands free kit gives you the possibility of interacting vocally with your mobile phone while driving even if your mobile device does not feature Voice Recognition You can also interact with your mobile phone manually and visually using the steering wheel controls and the instrument panel multi function display Please refer to the Fiat Blue amp Me Radio Supplement for further information 0306039361 Steering W
207. ities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants A C Air Filter WARNING Do not remove the A C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE The A C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet on the 2 Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage lower right of center console Perform the following the front retaining tab and remove the cover procedure to replace the filter Va 1 Remove the Torx screw that secures the passenger side console closeout cover Console Closeout Panel 3 Remove the two 5 5 mm screws 1 and 2 that secure 072670487 the particulate air filter cover to the HVAC housing Torx amp Screw Location MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 a gt 072670489 s 072670493 Air Filter Cover Screw Locations A C Air Filter 4 Remove the A C air filter by pulling it straight out of 5 Install the A C air filter with the air filter position the housing Take note of the air filter position indica indicators pointing in the same direction as removal tors 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE IEEE CAUTION The A C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often 6 Install the passenger side console closeout Ref
208. jure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICS inflate Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain side impact events 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABICs Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs The trim covering above the side win dows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstruc tions Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs In order for the SABICS to work as intended do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require perma nent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason The SABICs and SABs Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side impacts The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate based on the severity and type of collision The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate
209. ke the lap portion tight against the child seat 5 a N oo THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 To lock the seat belt pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor Then allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor As the webbing retracts you will hear a clicking sound This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor If it is locked you should not be able to pull out any web bing If the retractor is not locked repeat step 5 Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es strap See the section Installing Child Restraints 3 Using the Top Tether Anchorage for directions to NAS AEA attach a tether anchor tether strap of a rear facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position 9 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by located behind the top of the vehicle seat See the pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt section Lower Anchors and Tethers for C
210. l can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear The brake fluid level should be checked when the pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both the brake system and the clutch release system The two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak in one system will not affect the other system The manual transmission clutch release system should not require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle If the brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does not indicate any leaks or other problems it may be a result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system See your local authorized dealer for service Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use
211. lectronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers TES 4 gt h PE 051110796 Shift Lever 236 STARTING AND OPERATING See Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears The transmission shift lever has PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL DRIVE and AutoStick shift positions Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section for further information Toggling the shift lever forward or rearward while in the AutoStick position beside the DRIVE position will manually select the transmission gear and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1 2 3 etc NOTE If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK REVERSE or NEUTRAL position when pushed for ward it is probably in the AutoStick position beside the DRIVE position In AutoStick mode the transmission gear 1 2 3 etc is displayed in the instrument cluster Move the shift lever to the right into the DRIVE D position for access to PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE After selecting any gear range
212. lerations decelerations and will de crease your fuel economy The index is recalculated approximately every second and takes into account a combination of the instant fuel economy and your driving style during the current trip NOTE Different trips may have different values even if the same driving style is maintained Some factors that may impact the calculated index value are e Traffic conditions e Trip duration Temperature engine and ambient 17 Fuel Gauge Shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the ON RUN position es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157 18 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The EVIC features a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 19 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads Continued CAUTION Continued H pull over and stop the vehicle
213. lever can be I i Wi Operation raised or lowered to access these modes BREFIDUMERE Wiper 2p S Push the lever downward to the first detent The wipers EZ will operate intermittently NOTE The Intermittent function only has one detent but wiper delay will vary with changes in vehicle speed As vehicle speed increases the delay time will decrease Low Speed Push the lever downward to the second detent The wipers will operate at low speed High Speed Push the lever downward to the third detent The wipers Windshield Wiper Operation will operate at high speed 031570041 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Manual High Speed Mist CAUTION Push the lever upward from the off position The wipers will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle This operation will continue until the lever is released When the lever is released the wipers will return to the off position and automatically e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off shut off In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the Park posi Front Windshield Washer Operation tion before turning off the engine If the wiper Pull the windshield wiper washer lever toward the switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the steering wheel to acti
214. lity features are cancelled There fore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable The Full Off ESC mode is intended for off highway or offroad use only 260 STARTING AND OPERATING ME ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator ESC Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the MAR ACC ON RUN position for four seconds If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during accel eration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the
215. ll four tire pressure value locations es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 3 Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the button approximately one second to go back to the main screen Lock When Unlock Driver Door is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first push of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Unlock Drivers Door is selected you must push the RKE trans mitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger door When All Doors is selected both of the doors will unlock on the first push of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection push and release the SELECT button until Unlock Driver Door or All Doors appears Exit Menu This function closes the initial menu screen Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the main screen Push and release the AA button to return to the first EB menu option Speed Beep Push and release the V button to return to the last menu option Daylights 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME SALES CODE RAB RADIO 0415039362 RAB Radio Introduction The radio has been designed according to the specifica tions of the passenger compartment with a personalized design to match the style of the dashboard If the radio has BLUE amp ME refer to the appropriate BLUE amp ME User s Manual for further information The instructions fo
216. lling of the volume if the Fader level adjustment is equal to R 9 Source Can Not Be Selected Nothing has been loaded Load the CD or the MP3 CD to be listened to E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 CD Player Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone The CD Does Not Play Refer to the appropriate BLUE amp ME User s Manual The CD is dirty Clean the CD for further information The CD is scratched Try using another CD Personal Portable Navigation Device PND The CD Can Not Be Loaded A Personal Portable Navigation Device PND is avail able as optional equipment for this vehicle refer to the A CD is already loaded Press the amp button and remove Navigation User Guide for further information the CD MP3 File Reading iPod USB MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL IF EQUIPPED Ti j ile Playi Files a a Mains laying TERES This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be The CD is scratched or dirty plugged into the USB or AUX port located in the center The Duration Of The Mp3 Tracks Is Not Correctly console Displayed In some cases due to the recording mode the duration of the MP3 tracks can be displayed incorrectly 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 0440043698 USB AUX Port 1 Auxiliary Cable Jack 2 USB C
217. luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 270 STARTING AND OPERATING M 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle The follow ing table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and num ber and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 892 kg TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 Ibs 865 Ibs MINUS Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 tbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING 271 AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs 325 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 272 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in overheating and tire failure TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to
218. manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 266 STARTING AND OPERATING x Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a minimum of three hours Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure Pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi cle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the re
219. may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40 F 5 C or if roads are covered with ice or snow For more informa tion contact an authorized dealer Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall Use Summer tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle WARNING Do not use Summer tires in snow ice conditions You could lose vehicle control resulting in severe injury or death Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter Snow tires can be identified by a mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall STARTING AND OPERATING 277 If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the origi nal equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than wh
220. mounted for quiet opera tion it is normal to hear it running during this time MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED Five Speed Manual Transmission WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline Shift Lever Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator pedal STARTING AND OPERATING 231 Use each gear in numerical order do not skip a gear Be sure the transmission is in first gear not third when starting from a standing position Damage to the clutch can result from starting in third gear For most city driving you will find it easier to use only the lower gears For steady highway driving with light accelerations fifth gear is recommended Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged This will cause abnormal wear on the clutch Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a complete stop NOTE During cold weather until the transmission lu bricant is warm you may experience slightly higher shift efforts This is normal and not harmful to the transmis sion 232 STARTING AND OPERATING EEENEEEEEEEEMEMMMMMMNECCC Recommended Shif
221. n that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintain ing servicing and repairing FCA USA LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward lan guage with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 405 problems the first time using step by step troubleshoot ing and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac quaint you with specific FCA USA LLC vehicles In cluded are starting operating emergency and mainte nance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips e Call toll free at 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or e Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating a
222. n use and while driving the vehicle e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the bat tery even more quickly Only use these intermit tently and with great caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CIGAR LIGHTER IF EQUIPPED CUPHOLDERS This is located on the center console in front of the cup For the driver and front passenger cupholders are lo holders To activate the cigar lighter push and release the cated on the floor console between the front seats knob After a few seconds the knob automatically returns to its initial position and the cigar lighter is ready for use WARNING When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot To avoid serious injury handle the cigar lighter with care Always check that the cigar lighter has turne
223. nce it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping STARTING AND OPERATING 281 Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 055007576 Tread Wear Indicators 1 Worn Ti
224. nctions Tire Pressure Monitoring Display 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EVIC Displays Instrument Cluster Red Telltales Left Bank Hood Ajar e Low Oil Pressure e Electronic Throttle Control A Door Ajar e Speed Limiter If Equipped Amber Telltales o Ice Risk e Fuel Cut Off e Fuel Cut Off Failed e Hill Holder Failed Oil Change Request Check Lights e Vehicle Lock 3 Electronic Speed Control Active Amber Telltales Generic Warning Light Glow Plug Light e Park Sensor Failed e Stop Lamp Failed ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 5 Red Telltales Right Bank e Trunk Ajar e Transmission Failure e Battery Charge Indicator 6 Exceeded Speed Limiter 7 Shift Up or Down Indicators 8 Gear Indicator EVIC Control Buttons Push and release the MENU button briefly to access the EVIC Push and hold the MENU button approximately one second to return to the main screen Push and release the UP AA button to scroll upward through the displayed menu and the related options or to increase the displayed value Push and release the DOWN V button to scroll down ward through the displayed menu and the related options or to decrease the value displayed NOTE UP A and DOWN V buttons activate differ ent functions according to the following situations To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards To increase or decrease values during settings NOTE W
225. nd the ignition switch position is OFF LOCK sounds a signal to remove the key SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unau thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned to the ON RUN position it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics CAUTION e Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not com patible with some aftermarket remote starting sys tems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle On
226. ng as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 Enhanced TPM System When the vehicle is equipped with an enhanced TPM system the driver can view text messages showing the actual tire pressure value by position by selecting the tire pressure menu command in the instrument cluster Refer to Instrument Panel Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Premium TPM System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module The TPMS consists of the following components Receiver module Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings J The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will displ
227. ng maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155 The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 15 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light es If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake sys
228. ng the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the on position and stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immedi ately ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING Continued Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may EN not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service If your seat including your WARNING Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with dis abilities contact your authorized dealer stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper ve
229. ngine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 CAUTION WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked aS vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result NOTE A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people should be considered a normal part of the break in and riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously not interpreted as a problem injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your SAFETY TIES vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat Transporting Passengers belts NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and AREA using a seat belt properly 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you un
230. nnect the Sealant Hose 6 to the valve stem Check that the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode Push the Power Button 4 to turn On the Tire Service Kit 2 Connect the Power Plug 8 to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle if available Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the Tire Service Kit 3 The Sealant Bottle 1 may be empty due to previous use Call for assistance EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 315 NOTE If the Mode Select Knob 5 is on Air Mode and the pump is operating air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose 7 only not the Sealant Hose 6 If the sealant white fluid does flow through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose typically takes 30 70 seconds As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose 6 the Pressure Gauge 3 can read as high as 70 psi 4 8 Bar The Pressure Gauge 3 will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi 4 8 Bar to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty 2 The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi ately after the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver side latch pillar recommended pressure Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge 3 If the tire does not inflate to at l
231. nt antifreeze when the possible engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine prevent scalding or injury do not remove the coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant pressure cap while the system is hot or under antifreeze remains pressurized pressure Cooling System Pressure Cap Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is ad equate With the engine off and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be be
232. nt windshield The sun visor can be rotated downward or up against the door glass Both sun visors are equipped with courtesy mirrors 030436593 Sun Visor Passenger Side Shown 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x BLUE amp ME HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION Blue amp Me Hands Free Communication Overview If Equipped Windows Mobile based FIAT BLUE amp ME is a per sonal telematic system enabling you to use communica tion and entertainment applications expressly designed for use in the car The BLUE amp ME system installed on your car is equipped with a hands free kit message reader and media player and it is preset for future installation of additional services The BLUE amp ME system fully integrated with voice commands buttons on the steering wheel and multifunc tion display messages gives you the possibility of inter acting with your Bluetooth wireless technology mobile phone even if you keep it in your pocket or bag without having to take your eyes off the road or remove your hands from the steering wheel To use voice commands you are not required to train the voice recognition system to recognize your voice This implies that the system is nearly equally performing with different persons i e the voice recognition system is of the speaker independent type With this system you can also play your favorite music stored on USB device and select tracks and playback modes w
233. o Controls 208 Replacement Bulbs ss ria maa a E a 384 Replacement Keys i 2 ss dba eridi a8 4 tes 14 Replacement Patis peci dros Ea tacie aia mae iaa 344 Replacement Tires esse y agere Red Ene a 282 Reporting Safety Defects 0 0 403 Restraints Child llle 55 Restraints Occupant 6 6 eee 26 Rotation Tires eaux eR RISUS ES 284 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle s 79 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 81 Safety Defects Reporting llle 403 Safety Exhaust Gas 0 000000000004 78 Safety Information Tire 0 0 261 oafety IPSs jose sore dise bv E A Een 77 Schedule Maintenance lere 394 Seat Belt Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode 38 Energy Management Feature 36 Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 38 Lap Shoulder Belts 000000005 29 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting 34 Pregnant Women 0049404 eae cide ete E 35 Seat Belt Extender 0 0 00 c eens 34 Seat Belt Pretensioner 0000000 35 Seat Belt System 0 ee eee eee ee eee 26 Seat Belt Maintenance 0 000000 376 Seat Belts ee eee 27 Child Restraint vs 4 4 0 5n e ed bx 55 Extender i223 pag ow SEG ERG RIESGO EEG 34 Front Seat uade en nace au Kae 27 Inspection adi eo PRX EA RR aea ras 79 Operating Instructions sees 32 Pregnant Women 6 eee eee eee 35
234. o maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving and many other situations Operation When the shift lever is in the AutoStick position beside the Drive position it can be moved forward and rear ward This allows the driver to manually select the transmission gear being used Moving the shift lever forward triggers a downshift and rearward an upshift The current gear is displayed in the instrument cluster NOTE In AutoStick mode the transmission will only shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever rearward or forward except as described below The transmission will automatically upshift when nec essary to prevent engine over speed The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear ee STARTING AND OPERATING 243 e The transmission will automatically downshift to first e Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when gear when coming to a stop After a stop the driver AutoStick is engaged should manually upshift the transmission as the now Th automatic shift m ifa vehicle is accelerated e The system may revert to automatic shift mode i fault or overheat condition is detected e You can Stari But from a stop in
235. oaded vehicle condition Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWKRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this manual 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and T ine th i loadi iti f E o determine the maximum loading conditions of your passengers that will be riding in your vehicle vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas EN XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 295 kg since 5 x 150 Ibs 68 kg 750 Ibs 340 kg and 1400 lbs 635 kg 750 Ibs 340 kg 650 lbs 295 kg Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
236. of injury in collisions How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it Occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking who are using booster seats The locked mode is Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode 3 Allow the seat belt to retract As the seat belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode only used to install rear facing or forward facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Supplemental Restraint System SRS e Seat Belt Pretenioners Air Bag System Components e Seat Belt Buckle Switch Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag e Seat Track Position Sensors AME dal Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the Air Bag Warning Light Af driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The Instrument Panel passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG and AIRBAG are embossed on Advanced Front Air Bags the air bag covers Occupant Restraint Controller O
237. ol ume is adjusted to the new level selected Audio Adjustment The functions that can be selected from the audio menu change depending on the context AM FM MEDIA SATELLITE Push the AUDIO button briefly to change the Audio functions After the AUDIO button is first pushed the display will show the Bass level value for the source activated at that time e g in FM mode the display will show the wording FM Bass 2 Use the buttons A or V to scroll through the Menu functions To change the setting of the selected func tion use the or P buttons The current status of the selected function appears on the display The functions managed by the Audio Menu are BASS Bass adjustment MIDRANGE Midrange adjustment TREBLE Treble adjustment BALANCE right left Balance adjustment FADER front rear Balance adjustment LOUDNESS if equipped Loudness function activation deactivation EQUALIZER if equipped activation and selection of factory equalization adjustments USER EQUALIZER if equipped customized equal ization adjustment 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Tone Adjustment Proceed as follows 1 Push the AUDIO button 2 Push the A or V button to select Bass Mid range or Ireble in the AUDIO menu 3 Push the lt or button to increase decrease the bass or treble adjustments By pushing the or buttons briefly the levels will change progressively By pushing them
238. on 10 Disassemble the jack and tools and place them in the bag Stow it under the driver s seat and secure the bag to the floor with the straps attached to the floor of the vehicle 11 Check the tire pressure as soon as possible Correct the tire pressure as required JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury 328 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur Preparations For Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of the engine compartment ME 0309039359 Battery Posts 1 Positive Battery Post Covered With Protective Cap 2 Negative Battery Post a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 329 WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can s
239. on the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149 as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety CAUTION Continued of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the sensor damage Using aftermarket tire sealants may TPMS from functioning properly Always check the cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more Sensor to become inoperable After using an after tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the market tire sealant it is recommended that you take replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS Your vehicle toan authorized dealership to have your to continue to function properly sensor function checked 2 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator CAUTION Light If Equipped The TPMS has been optimized for the original ESC This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and OFF trol ESC is off warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage ma
240. on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning the air conditioning pressing the A C button on will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the Defrost mode Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE Automatic Temperature Controls ATC will au tomatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield When this occurs recirculation will be unavailable Summer Operation NOTE In some cases during high temperature opera tion the air conditioning system performance may be reduced This is to help protect the engine from overheat ing during the high load condition Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an automatic recirculation system When the system senses a heavy loa
241. only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may Continued WARNING Continued cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro longed braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch system performance Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transmis sion Manual Transmission If Equipped Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of th
242. onnector 045033001 Refer to the appropriate Blue amp Me radio User s Manual Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering for iPod or external USB device support capability Wheel es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pushing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD AUX Media Player etc and can also be used to select enter an item while scrolling through menu The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pushing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset button CD Player Operation Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current
243. ons of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Continued 284 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued e Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES Due to limited clearance tire chains or traction devices are not recommended CAUTION Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates STARTING AND OPERATING 285
244. ontrol and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners e Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfer ing with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Continued WARNING Continued Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly in stalled if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the
245. ore the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the instrument cluster all warnings including door and gate and Change Engine Oil will only be displayed in the EVIC display Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 22 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 1 0 gallon 3 8L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added 23 Generic Warning Light The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if any of the following conditions occur Oil Change Request Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Failure External Light Failure Fuel Cut Off Intervention Fuel Cut Off Not Available Parking Sensor Failure 24 Cruise On Indicator If Equipped pr 25 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain S
246. ors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Restraint Only Top Tether Anchor Rear Facing Up to 65 Ibs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Rear Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Forward Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Forward Facing More than X Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children LATCH Restraint System Anchor Tether We LATCH The next generation of child safety 022668173 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH equipped child seats There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position These anchorages are used to install LATCH equipped child seats without using the vehicle s seat belts Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages In these seating positions the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint Please see the following table for more information 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 022669374 e Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position e S Top Tether Anchora
247. otice increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and potential activation of the Brake System Warning Light In the event power assist is lost for any reason i e repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function However the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic brake control system that includes the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Brake Assist System BAS Traction Con trol System TCS Hill Start Assist HSA and Electronic Stability Control ESC All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS The Four Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking con ditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces The system s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation which is normal ee STARTING AND OPERATING 253 The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light When the light is illuminated the ABS is not functioning The system revert
248. our vehicle If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is Wheel And Wheel Trim Care considered the responsibility of the owner All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and e If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly cause that destroys the paint and protective coating with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use theown t MOPAR Wheel Cleaner ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners abrasives or polishing compounds They will perma nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH Used on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish CAUTION Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning P
249. p the power convertible top switch is located on the overhead console The switch contains two buttons The passenger side button is used to open the power top and the driver side button is used to close the power top Power Convertible Top Switch NOTE The power top buttons will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ACC ON RUN position The power top can be remotely operated with the key fob Refer to Opening Power Top Remote Function in Things To Know Before Starting for more infor mation Lowering The Power Top Auto Open Push the top open button approximately one second for the three quarter open spoiler position Push the top open button for approximately one second a second time to fully open the convertible top Manual Open For manual open push and hold the open button until desired roof position or until spoiler position E UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 NOTE Vertical movement only operates in auto open close mode Raising The Power Top Auto Close From the convertible top fully open position push the top close button for approximately one second for the three quarter open spoiler position Push the top close button for approximately one second a second time for the one quarter open position Push and hold close button to fully close convertible top Manual Close For manual close push and hold the close button until desired position until one quarter open
250. p function wait until all the values have been displayed or hold the MENU button for longer than one second Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU approxi mately one second to go back to the main screen without storing settings 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Trip Functions Both trip functions are resettable reset start of new trip Trip A can be used to display the figures relating to e Range e Trip distance A e Average economy Instantaneous economy Average speed A e Travel time A driving time Trip B can be used to display the figures relating to Trip distance B Average economy e Average speed B Travel time B driving time NOTE Trip B functions may be excluded see Trip B Data Range and Instantaneous consumption cannot be reset Values Displayed Range This indicates the distance which may be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank assuming that driving conditions will not change The message will appear on the display in the following cases e Distance less than 30 miles or 50 km The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine running E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 NOTE The range depends on several factors driving style type of route freeway residential mountain roads etc conditions of use of the car load tire pressure etc Trip planning m
251. partment 2 Multifunction Lever Light Control 8 Glove Compartment 14 Shift Lever 3 Instrument Cluster And Warning Lights 9 Rear Defrost Button 15 Sport Button 4 Windshield Wiper Washer Trip Computer 10 Hazard Button 16 Horn Driver Airbag 5 Central Air Vents 11 Climate Controls 17 Boost Gauge 6 Storage Compartment Radio 12 Power Windows Control 144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL TURBO BOOST GAUGE Your vehicle is equipped with a boost gauge and inte grated shift light indicator located to the left of the instrument cluster The boost gauge indicates the intake manifold pressure relative to barometric pressure The engine management system in your vehicle intelligently regulates intake manifold pressure based on environ mental ambient and engine operating conditions pe mm A xen v Rm 12 t G 9 SHIFT UP turbo p5 Turbo Boost Gauge 1 Turbo Boost Gauge 2 Shift Light Indicator INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ECO 0403060690 146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER POP LOUNGE 500C 0403060691 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped i Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when
252. peed Limit With this function it is possible to set the car speed limit mph or km h to immediately alert the driver when the set limit is exceeded To set the speed limit proceed as follows 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button to enter the Main MENU 2 Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button to select Speed Beep Push and release the MENU button push and release the UP or DOWN buttons to select Speed Limit activation On or deactivation Off 3 When the function is activated On briefly push and release the MENU button to display the presently set activation speed Pushing the UP or DOWN buttons selects the speed limit Push and release the MENU button to confirm selection NOTE The setting can be increased or decreased by 5 mph or km h each time the UP DOWN button is pushed for speed settings above 20 mph 32 km h To increase or decrease the set speed rapidly push and hold the UP DOWN button Save the setting by briefly push ing the button when you approach the required setting Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 To cancel the setting proceed as follows For activation deactivation proceed as follows 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button On will 1 Briefly push and release the MENU b
253. pply 398 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic e Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve hicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR E WARRANTY INFORMATION 403 YOUR VEHICLE nk ee RR S 400 E REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS 403 Prepare For The Appointment 400 In The 50 United States And Washington D C 403 Prepare A LisE os za gages cred edes 400 Nite elec con PE 404 Be Reasonable With Requests 400 E PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS 404 B IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE 400 ll DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM FIAT Customer Center ai fel Rola eae eo Wt Wala es Re esl 401 TIRE QUALITY GRADES FIAT Canada Customer Center 401 TreadWear eirese ea a le RE E ds d wd Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY E E ad 401 Traction Grades cide i ah ede e na vn Mien ade o etes e a te aT iion 406 Service Contract eee 402 Temperatu
254. previous CD track and the button to play the next track The tracks are selected cyclically the first track is selected after the last track and vice versa If the track has been played for more than 3 seconds pushing the button starts the track again from the beginning In this case if you want to play the previous track push the 4 button twice consecu tively 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Track Fast Forward Rewind Keep the amp button pushed down to fast forward the selected track and keep the 4 button pushed down to fast rewind the track The fast forward rewind will stop once the button is released Pause Function To pause the CD player push the JY button The word ing CD Pause appears on the display To resume listening to the track push the f button again CD MP3 Player Introduction This chapter describes the operation of the CD MP3 player NOTE Layer 3 audio decoding technology is licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia MP3 Mode In addition to playing regular audio CDs the radio is also enabled to play CDROMs on which compressed audio files have been recorded in an MP3 format To guarantee optimal reproduction it is advisable to use good quality CDs burned at the lowest speed possible The files on an MP3 CD are structured in folders that create lists of all the folders containing MP3 tracks folders or subfolders are all on the same level The folders tha
255. ptimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The Brake Assist System BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail ing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS The Traction Control System TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping ee STARTING AND OPERATING 255 wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide en hanced
256. push BASS high tones TREBLE left Adjustment type selection push A or V right balance BALANCE front Adjustment of values push lt q orp rear balance FADER j Information Song Artist Album Genre Play Button list Folder information if avail able in CD Media Player and Sat ellite if so equipped Toggles RBDS information in FM ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 BUTTON GENERAL FUNCTIONS MODE MENU Advanced functions adjustment Menu activation short button push Adjustment type selection push A or V Adjustment of values push lt q or Vol Vol Volume adjustment Push button volume increase Push button volume decrease BUTTON RADIO FUNCTIONS MODE 4 Radio Station Search Automatic search push buttons AV e Automatic Search lt or p long push for fast for e Manual Search ward Manual search push buttons A or V long push for fast forward 12345 Current radio station storing Long button push for memory pre set 1 to 5 respectively Stored station recall Short button push for memory pre set 1 to 5 respectively 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME BUTTON CD FUNCTIONS MODE A CD ejection Short button push 4 Previous next track play Short button push lt q orp lt gt CD track fast forward rewind Long button push lt q orp AV Previous next folder play for CD Short button push
257. r pedestrians animals above or below the sensors will not be detected other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surround ings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using Rear Park Assist Continued 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED e Before using the Rear Park Assist System it is The power sunroof roof switch is located in the overhead strongly recommended that the ball mount and Console hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the ve hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle 034164715 Power Sunroof Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 WARNING e Never leave children
258. r use are given below and we recom mend you to read them carefully Suggestions Road Safety Please learn how to use all different radio functions e g store stations before beginning to drive Reception Conditions Reception conditions change constantly while driving Reception may be interfered with by the presence of mountains buildings or bridges or when you are far away from the broadcaster E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 WARNING Having the volume turned up high can cause the driver to not be able to hear important traffic sounds i e sirens horns etc Failure to hear traffic sounds and other important audible information can result in serious injury or death Always adjust the volume so that you can still hear background noises Care And Maintenance Clean the cover with a soft antistatic cloth only Cleaning and polishing products could damage the surface CDs The presence of dirt scratches or distortions on the CDs could cause skipping and poor sound quality while it is playing For optimal playback conditions follow these guidelines e Only use branded CDs Clean every CD thoroughly removing any finger marks or dust using a soft cloth Hold CDs by the outside and clean them from the middle outwards Never use chemicals e g antistatics or thinners or sprays for cleaning as they could damage the surface of the CDs After listening to them place CDs back in their boxes to preven
259. rated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed push the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the SET button N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANC button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pushing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed in memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph 40 km h To Vary The Sp
260. ration is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States MRXC4W4MA4 Canada 2546A CAWAMAA Single STARTING AND OPERATING 295 FUEL REQUIREMENTS RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATH mans MC TMOG This engine is designed to meet all emis sion regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso 91 9090259 ine with a minimum octane rating of 87 For optimum performance and fuel economy the use of EB 91 octane or higher is recommended Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline with the ap propriate octane rating for your engine before consider ing service for the vehicle 206 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicl
261. rculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Se lect the outside air position for maximum defogging Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost e The A C can be deselected manually without dis turbing the mode control selection 4 Mode Control Rotate this control to change the system between Modes Panel Bi Level Floor Mix Defrost e Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be ad justed to direct airflow A NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear e Bi Level e Air is directed through the panel and floor A outlets e Floor v Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demister outlets e Mix w Air is directed through the floor defrost and ugh side window demister outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing mois ture on the windshield e Defrost Hy Air is directed through the windshield
262. re 2 New Tire Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread replaced grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1 16 of an inch 2 mm When the tread is 282 STARTING AND OPERATING ME worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Refer to Replacement Tires in this section for further information Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to Driving style Tire pressure Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in the need for earlier tire replace ment e Distance driven Performance tires tires with a speed rating of V or higher and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main tenance schedule is highly recommended WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and g
263. re Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom mended ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 Maintenance Free Battery WARNING Continued Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean e Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other e Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of t
264. re DESUBB osese aa on 407 400 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE BEEN SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you are having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt
265. re Pressure Monitoring System message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes STARTING AND OPERATING 293 A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected In this case the Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System message is then fol lowed with a graphic display with pressure values still 204 STARTING AND OPERATING ME shown This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position The system still needs to be serviced as long as the Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System message is displayed NOTE The TPMS will not monitor the pressure in a replace ment tire installed without a tire pressure sensor If you install a replacement tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning
266. re inflation pressures tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires 276 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Repair If your tire becomes damaged it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria e The tire has not been driven on when flat The damage is only on the tread section of your tire sidewall damage is not repairable e The puncture is no greater than a 1 4 of an inch 6 mm Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information Damaged Run Flat tires or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description Load Index and Speed Symbol Tire Types All Season Tires If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons Spring Summer Fall and Winter Traction levels may vary between different all season tires All season tires can be identified by the M S M amp S M S or MS designation on the tire sidewall Use all season tires only in sets of four failure to do so
267. riving through standing water limits your vehi andas ki iliti hich i i and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water elea DIGNE rap apies h increases moppie Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you distances Therefore after driving through stand ing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes e Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your pas sengers and others around you 246 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued CAUTION Continued Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle s drivetrain components Always inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil trans mission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through stan
268. rmation A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con tact anything that can burn 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine perfor mance and cause serious damage to the engine e Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and a
269. rmula OAT Organic Additive Technology that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 90032 Mix a minimum solution of 50 OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan dard MS 90032 and distilled water Use higher concen trations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE e Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types is not recom mended and can result in cooling system damage If WARNING HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the have a authorized dealer drain flush and refill with cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution OAT coolant conforming to MS 90032 as soon as Never add engine coola
270. rocedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE IEEE Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPARQ Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original
271. rol buttons on the steering wheel or by the BLUE amp ME voice commands The BLUE amp ME message reader enables the following operations To display an indicator on the instrument panel that indicates you have received a new SMS text It will display the sender s number name and will ask you whether to read the text of the message to you To manage the list of SMS texts received on your BLUE amp ME paired mobile phone To read the messages received and stored Messages can be read multiple times To call the SMS text sender using the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 To delete individual messages or the entire inbox using the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands The BLUE amp ME system can also recognize and read abbreviations if any e g ILUVU will be read like I love you and interpret the most usual emoticons e g will be read like Smile that are currently used to write SMS texts Media Player With the BLUE amp ME media player you can play the digital audio files stored on a USB device by simply connecting it to the USB port located in the center console of the car A second USB port used for charging only is located in the glovebox In this way while you are driving you can play your favorite music collections iPod amp Player See dedicated paragraph under Me dia Player Functions The media player
272. rotect you properly The lap portion could you from injury during a collision You are more ride too high on your body possibly causing inter likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not nal injuries Always buckle your seat belt into the wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt buckle nearest you are meant to be used together A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a properly In a sudden stop you could move too far collision and leave you with no protection Inspect forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts your seat belt snugly frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be re A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous placed immediately Do not disassemble or modify Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the the seat belt system Seat belt assemblies must be vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury replaced after a collision A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision Continued 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and INS L X Da 7m adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the
273. rs parallel to walls Failure Indications A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system is indicated during REVERSE gear engagement by the instrument panel warning icon and message displayed on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC display UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 The warning icon is illuminated and a message A is displayed on the EVIC display if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the ignition is in the ON RUN position Failures are indi cated immediately if they occur when the system is ON Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor is in failure condition the EVIC shall indicate that the Rear Park Assist system is unavailable without reference to the sensor in failure condition If even a single sensor fails the entire system must be disabled The system is turned off automatically 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths In washing stations clean sensors quickly keeping the va por jet high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 in 10 cm from the sensors Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could damage the sensors Park Assist System
274. rtment and the fluid level should be checked at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with wind shield washer solvent not engine coolant antifreeze Refer to Engine Compartment in this section for fur ther information ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further info
275. s occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child WARNING e Side Air Bags need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat e Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions Side Air Bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags NOTE Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es If A Deployment Occurs As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye collisions This does not mean something is wrong with irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or the air bag system throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your
276. s a substitute for the ihe engine is idling normally and your toot ds firmly pressing the brake pedal parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move Continued ment and possible injury or damage TEMPE Continued 238 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the number of reasons A child or others could be parking brake shift the transmission into PARK seriously or fatally injured Children should be turn the engine OFE and remove the ignition key warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal Once the key is removed the transmission is or the shift lever locked in PARK securing the vehicle against un Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle wanted movement or in a location accessible to children A child When leaving the vehicle always remove the igni could operate power windows other controls or tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle move the vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 239 CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must
277. s as safe as possible Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat 2 If a child from 2 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child restraint must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints 3 Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly Refer to Child Restraints should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older chil dren who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat 4 Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm 5 You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 6 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 7 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate 12 years or younger including a ch
278. s kit will provide a temporary tire seal allowing you WARNING to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles 160 km with a maximum speed of 55 mph 90 km h You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time Continued WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 309 Tire Service Kit Storage Tire Service Kit Components And Operation The Tire Service Kit is located under the front driver s seat o j Tire Service Kit Components 1 Sealant Bottle 5 Mode Select Knob 060535908 2 Deflation Button 6 Sealant Hose Clear 8 Pressure Gauge 7 Air Pump Hose Black Tire Service Kit Location 4 Power Button 8 Power Plug located on the bot tom side of the Tire Service Kit 310 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Using The Power Button Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following Push and release the Power Button 4 once to symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode turn On the Tire Service Kit Push and release Selecting Air Mode the Power Button 4 again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit g Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to A this position for air pump operation only Use Using The Deflation Button the Black Air Pump Hose 7 when selecting Push the Deflation Button 2 to reduce the air
279. s may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems FCA US LLC 15FX24 126 AD AR Fourth Edition Printed in U S A
280. s to standard non anti lock brakes Turning the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the fault detected was only momentary WARNING Pumping the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded Continued WARNING Continued The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others When you are in a severe braking condition involving the use of the ABS you will experience some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake system Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation You may also hear a clicking noise These occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is functioning properly 254 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to o
281. s wear your seat belts even though you have air bags Advanced Front Air Bag Operation Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts Ad vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Ad vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 way as the air bags inflate to their full size The Ad
282. sconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet 3 Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle 4 Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire service center 318 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 5 Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument panel after the tire has been repaired Replace the Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos sible Refer to F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace ment NOTE When having the tire serviced advise the autho rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the Tire Service Kit F Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement T 2 Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 clear in color Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed area under the sealant bottle Push the Sealant Bottle release button The Sealant Bottle 1 will pop up Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly 4 Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit housing Position the new Sealant Bottle 1 in the housing so that the Sealant Hose 6 aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing Push the bottle into the housing An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place Verify that the cap is installed on the
283. screw to the right Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained Minimum tire lift provides maximum stabil ity 6 Remove the wheel bolts and pull the wheel off the hub For vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels the center caps must be removed to remove the wheel bolts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack 060535918 Jack Location WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough 7 Install the wheel and wheel bolts with the cone shaped to remove the tire end of the bolts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 327 bolts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left 9 Finish tightening the bolts Push down on the wrench while tightening the wheel bolts Alternate bolts until each bolt has been tightened twice Refer to Torque Specifications in this section for proper lug bolt torque If you doubt that you have tightened the bolts correctly have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service stati
284. sher Adding Fluid iue re riesaa 356 Washers Windshield llis 114 Washing Vehicle 1 2 0 cee eee 371 Water Driving Through 000 245 Wheel And Wheel Trim 0 0 00005 372 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care lun 372 Wind Buffeling si adorare sore enhn XE Res 24 424 INDEX M Window Fogging baai asad baai asis 219 WINGOWS esi tere an a ala a oe as OR eir a 23 POWeO E 3G kx e048 bid oe heed Sees 23 Windshield Defroster 0 00000 eee 79 Windshield Washers llle 114 Windshield Wiper Blades llle 354 Windshield Wipers 00000000005 114 Wiper Blade Replacement 354 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnet
285. ss facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Larger Children Children who have out grown their forward facing child restraint but are too small to properly fit the vehicle s seat belt Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve hicle seat belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger who have out grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Vehicle Seat Belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rear facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Two types of child restraints can be used rear facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rear facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rear facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rear facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rear facing until they reach the highest w
286. ssigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle 406 All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE BEEN Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 407 WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded
287. straints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Rear Head Restraints To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint push the adjust ment button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Refer to Occu pant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for information on tether routing ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 030936590 a Adjustment Button Hood Release Lever TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Rotate the safety catch under the front edge of the To open the hood two latches must be released hogd mear The contet and raise the OD 1 Pull the bottom of the RED hood release lever located on the left kick panel rearward 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 031364713 Hood Safety Latch Location Hood Prop Rod 3 Lift the hood prop rod that clips to the right side left In hot climates the prop rod may be hot Pick up the prop side when standing in front of the hood of the engine rod at the foam on the end of the prop rod compartment Place the hood prop rod in the hole of hood hinge to secure the hood in the open position ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEA
288. t ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click In Automatic Locking Mode the shoulder belt is auto matically pre locked The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger seating positions with a combination lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing child restraint in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rear facing child restraint Only use a rear facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode WARNING 1 Buckle th bination houlder belt Med Rd The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR fea the entire seat belt is extracted ture or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the proce dures in the Service Manual e Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk
289. t could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Child Restraints WARNING Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children In a collision an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so Every state in the United States and every Canadian province requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be pros ecuted for ignoring it great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle Children 12 years or younger should ride properly should be in a proper restraint for the child s size buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es There are different sizes and types of restraints for
290. t mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop EEE X STARTING AND OPERATING 245 DRIVING THROUGH WATER Shallow Standing Water Driving through water more than a few inches Although your vehicle is capable of driving through centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure shallow standing water consider the following Cautions safety and prevent damage to your vehicle and Warnings before doing so Flowing Rising Water WARNING WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water D
291. t Speeds Downshifting To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and economy it should be upshifted as listed in the following prolong engine life table CAUTION If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift at too high of a vehicle speed these conditions may cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds Units In mph km h Engine Accel 1t02 2to3 3to4 4to5 Size era selected and the clutch pedal is released Damage to Ron the clutch and the transmission can result from Rate skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting 1 4L Accel 14 23 29 38 at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal Turbo 23 37 47 61 is held pressed i e not released Cruise 12 18 25 32 19 29 40 52 To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life shift down to second or first gear when descending a steep grade en STARTING AND OPERATING 233 When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur dened AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is a
292. t belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition replace the seat belt Air Bag Warning Light e he light should come on and remain on for ry four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle c
293. t blower speed if needed Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or high humid ity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pushing the RECIRCULATION control button Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily The recirculation LED will illuminate when 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The recirculation feature may be unavailable indicator light shall blink if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield On systems with Manual Climate Con trols the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation Recircula tion will be disabled automatically if this mode is se lected Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Automatic Operation 1 Push the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel the indicator will illuminate when on 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the temperature con trol buttons Once the desired temperature is dis played the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level 3 When the
294. t do not contain MP3 tracks cannot be selected The specifications and operating conditions for playing MP3 files are the following e The CD ROMs used should be burned in accordance with ISO standard 9660 e The music files should have the extension mp3 or wma files with a different extension will not be reproduced ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 The sampling frequencies that can be reproduced are 44 1 kHz stereo from 96 to 320 kbit s 22 05 kHz mono or stereo from 32 to 80 kbit s e Tracks with a variable bit rate can be reproduced NOTE The track names must not include the following characters spaces apostrophes and open and close brackets During the burning of a MP3 CD make sure that the names of the files do not contain these characters if not the radio will not be able to play the tracks involved Selecting MP3 Sessions With Hybrid Discs If a hybrid disc is inserted Mixed Mode Enhanced CD Extra also containing MP3 files the radio automati cally starts playing the audio session It is possible to move to the MP3 session while playing by keeping the CD button pressed for more than two seconds NOTE When the function is activated the radio may take a few seconds to start playing While checking the disc the display will show CD Reading If no MP3 files are detected the radio will resume playing the audio session from the point where it was interrupted Displ
295. t the desired frequency band and then briefly push the corresponding preset button from 1 to 5 By pushing the preset button for more than two seconds the tuned station will be stored Pushing the A B C button will change between the preset memory group in the current frequency band Automatic Tuning Briefly push the or amp button to start the automatic tuning search for the next station that can be received in the selected direction If the or amp button is pushed for longer the rapid search is started When the button is released the tuner will stop on the next station that can be received Manual Tuning This is used to manually search for stations in the preselected band Select the desired frequency band and then push briefly and repeatedly the A or V button to start the search in the desired direction If the A or V button is pushed longer the fast search starts and then stops when the button is released Stereophonic Broadcasters If the incoming signal is weak the reproduction is automatically switched from Stereo to Mono SiriusXM Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite Radio Antenna If Equipped The antenna for the satellite radio is mounted on the roof of the vehicle Do not place items on the roof around the roof top antenna location Objects placed within the line E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items sho
296. t them from being damaged Do not expose CDs to direct sunlight high tempera tures or moisture for long periods Do not stick labels on the CD surface or write on the recorded surface with pencils or pens Do not use CDs that are very scratched flawed distorted etc Using discs like these will result in malfunctions or damage to the player 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e The use of original CD media is required for the best quality audio production Correct operation is not guaranteed when CD R RW media are used that were not correctly burned and or with a maximum capacity above 650 Mb Do not use commercially available protective sheets for CDs or discs with stabilizers etc as they could get stuck in the internal mechanism and damage the disc If a copy protected CD is used it may take a few seconds before the system starts to play it The CD player cannot be guaranteed to play all protected discs The fact that the CD is protected from being copied is often shown in very small letters or is difficult to read on the actual CD cover where it may be for example COPY CONTROL COPY PRO TECTED THIS CD CANNOT BE PLAYED ON A PC MAC The CD player is capable of reading most compression systems currently in use following the development of these systems the reading of all compression formats is not guaranteed Technical Specifications The complete system consists of Two 165 mm diameter mi
297. tart anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be injured by moving fan blades e Remove any metal jewelry such as rings watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured e Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 Set the parking brake shift the transmission into gear and turn the ignition to OFF LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 3 Remove the protective cover over the positive bat tery post To remove the cover pull upward on the cover 4 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF WARNING Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result Jump Starting Procedure WARNING Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion 330 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle Connecting The Jumper Cables 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the positi
298. tem is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on This light monitors the Anti lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 16 Gas Pedal Percentage GaugelTurbo GaugelECO In dex Gauge Depending on what options and trim level your vehicle is equipped with there are three gauges available Gas Pedal Percentage Gauge This gauge shows what percent the gas pedal is currently depressed at Turbo Gauge This gauge shows the current turbo usage ECO Index Gauge The ECO Index gauge allows the driver to monitor their driving style in order to increase fuel economy The efficiency of the driving style is displayed on a gauge located on the right side of the instrument cluster and ranges from a minimum value of 0 up to a maximum value of 5 0 low 5 high A higher ECO index indicates a more fuel efficient drive style and will increase your fuel economy A lower ECO index indicates frequent acce
299. ter Disposal isses hmm Re 347 Recommendation llle 347 Viscosity ne INDEX 419 Oil Filter Changes cis doen sored an ea s 348 Oil Filter Selection 2 0 000 cee eee 348 Onboard Diagnostic System 00 342 Operating Precautions essre aessa s siaaa 000 342 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 5 Overheating Engine a see erre Didot 307 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 5 Paint Care i v vac etenim P se A OE Ce RUM qaa 370 Parking Brake s esee gi se eR ERR E AES 248 Pelse cs d aco e eere uere A uE pd tous 76 Placard Tire And Loading Information 268 Power Door LOCKS 2 i es ce ea Rn 22 MITONG aii iol pn Ga bane ya erty dang S pes ed p 91 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 133 Irun A P Pm 247 Su nroOl udi beue ke arem eite gre eg i 130 WIDOWS erem etae Shs Beats t bees perdre ad es 23 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts Preparation For Jacking oceane terpamer 322 Pretensioners Seat Belts inre Rue a E E a EE 35 Radial Ply Tires Radio Operation ete scce e264 ren ER Ren Radio Reception 0 6 6 0 00 eee eee Radio Sound Systems Rear Liftgate Sedan Rear Window Features Recorder Event Data Recreational Towing Reformulated Gasoline Refrigerante ssa emec hex shag eee age wes Release Hood 0 0 0 cee eee Remote Keyless Entry RKE FCC General Information Power Convertible Top Function 420 INDEX M Remote Sound System Radi
300. tgate Front Rear Side Marker Lamps 2 Remove the two screws and remove the tail lamp 1 Remove portion of the wheel liner to allow hand assembly access to side marker lamp 2 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the housing 3 Pull the bulb from the socket and insert the replace ment bulb 4 Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place 5 Reinstall the wheel liner 073310795 Tail Lamp Assembly Screws 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 9 5 6 Remove four screws and separate the backplate from the lamp housing Remove the tail stop or turn signal bulbs by pushing them slightly and turning counter clockwise Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL 1 2 Remove the two guard caps and the two fastening screws Remove the center high mounted stop lamp assembly 3 4 5 Disconnect the electric connector Press the retaining device and open the bulb holder Remove the snap fitted bulb to be replaced and re place it Close the back cap locking it properly Reinstall the two fastening screws and reinstall the guard caps ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 10 5 Gallons 40 Liters Engine Oil with F
301. th an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR If Equipped The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be equipped with a switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR which is used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section of this manual The table below defines the type of feature for each seating position 022669375 e Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position e 4 Top Tether Anchorage Symbol en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Driver Center Passenger First Row N A N A ALR Second ALR N A ALR Row e N A Not Applicable ALR Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfor
302. the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side wall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat ing speeds loading and cold ti
303. the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or outboard front passenger s if equipped with BeltAlert seat belt remains unbuckled Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoul der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle WARNING e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Continued 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in
304. the front position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the move the child closer to the center of the vehicle or use way back a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly 3 Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder between their neck and arm WARNING 4 Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible touching the child s thighs and not their stomach Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back In a crash the shoulder belt 5 Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip will not protect a child properly which may result in If the answer to any of these questions was no then the Serious injury or death A child must always wear child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle If the both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt child is using the lap shoulder belt check seat belt fit correctly periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an X Below Child Restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Weight of the LATCH Seat Belt Only LATCH Seat Belt Top Child Child Lower Anch
305. thin 10 seconds turn the ignition switch to the STOP OFF LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Cold Weather Operation To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low temperatures this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the ambient temperature is less than 22 F 30 C and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not been used An externally powered electric engine block heater is available as optional equipment or from your authorized dealer The message plug in engine heater will be displayed in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5 F 15 C at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start CAUTION Use of the recommended SAE 5W 40 synthetic en gine oil and adhering to the prescribed oil change intervals is important to prevent engine damage and ensure satisfactory starting in cold conditions Extended Park Starting NOTE Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not been started or driven for at least 35 days 1 Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle 2 Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it when the engine starts ee STARTING AND OPERATING 229 3 If the engine fails to start within ten seconds cycle the ignition to the STOP O
306. this mode pressure in the tire if it becomes over inflated Selecting Sealant Mode Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions in o tiis Posten to myect the Tire Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle 1 and fa Service Bi oraint and t mllote the Sealant Hose 6 prior to the expiration date printed at tire Use the Sealant Hose clear hose the lower right hand corner on the bottle label to 6 when selecting this mode assure optimum operation of the system Refer to Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit section F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement 0604018634 Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location e The Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 are a one tire application use and need to be replaced after each use Always replace these components immediately at your original equipment vehicle dealer e When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form clean water and a damp cloth will remove the material WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 311 from the vehicle or tire and wheel components Once the sealant dries it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded For optimum performance make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire Service Kit You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle tires The kit also comes with two needles located in the Accessory Storage Compartment on the bottom of the air pump for inflating
307. tial engine control problem and the need A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced for system service above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you Continued ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153 WARNING Continued 13 Rear Defrost Indicator drive slowly or park over flammable substances such ste This indicator will illuminate when the rear win as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result dow defroster is on The rear window defroster in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or automatically turns off after 20 minutes CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to others 10 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the front the heating elements fog lights are on e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on 11 Electric Power Steering Malfunction Warning Light the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the This telltale is on when the Electric Power heating elements Labels can be peeled off after Steering is not operating and needs service soaking with warm water e Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Oe This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog Keep all objects a safe
308. tically for three cycles after the lever is released TILT STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward The tilt control lever is located on the left side of the steering column below the turn signal controls Tilt Control Lever Push down on the lever to unlock the column With one hand firmly on the steering wheel move the steering column up or down as desired Push the lever up to lock the column firmly in place ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 WARNING The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv Y y N d RAN S SS ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death R ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h Electronic Speed Control Buttons 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are ope
309. to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold tire pressure on the placard Once the low tire pressure warning Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 287 For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours tire pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temper
310. towed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground 324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES TIS C 4 Jack Warning Label CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle b 061674018 Center Cap Removal NOTE Before using the swivel wrench to remove the wheel bolts be sure to remove the center cap of the wheel 2 Remove center cap if equipped by inserting the angled tab end of the swivel wrench into the notched part of the center cap 1 Remove the scissors jack and tool bag from under the driver s seat WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 325 3 Loosen but do not remove the wheel bolts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground NOTE There are front and rear jacking locations on each side of the body as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding i Rear Jacking Location Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 4 Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location Once the jack is 060535016 positioned turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed Front Jacking Location 320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 5 Using the swivel wrench raise the vehicle by turning the jack
311. track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you push the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to the appropriate Blue amp Me User s Manual for further information CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays Store the disc in its case after playing Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc it may be damaged e g scratched reflective coat ing removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio
312. transmission into REVERSE gear and remove the Key Fob from the vehicle When leav ing the vehicle always lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or 020236009 m oe others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil Ignition Switch Positions dren should be warned not to touch the parking 1 STOP OFF LOCK brake brake pedal or the gear selector 2 MAR ACC ON RUN Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or 3 AVV START in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 WARNING Continued Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Locking Doors With A Key You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key to the left To unlock the door turn the key to the right Refer to Body Lubrication in Main taining Your Vehicle for maintenance procedures Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition a
313. triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment A low energy output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags WARNING e No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate e Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Continued 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Continued e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions air bags won t deploy at all Al way
314. trols 208 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 208 Stota MED IP Em 383 storage Vehicle amp ise sce eR ace ARR hen 220 storing Your Vehicle a d ciem x em e 383 Stuck Freeing duc veg dope EUER RE PUR Rea 331 422 INDEX M SUD ROO seeded a teu PRIUS MR end ain 130 Supplemental Restraint System Air Bag 39 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 214 Tilt Steering Column ai o eben 118 Tire And Loading Information Placard 267 Tire Markings or e REPERI RR en 261 TiYeS 2rd oes Leak MEG eg SE Ede ug 81 Aging Life Of Tires lees 282 Air Pressure llle 272 Chains 6 5 45456040 8s oad IG eid REOR Be 284 Changing 23 623 nee seeteegie tee 320 Compact Spare edsa rasai hua a E 279 General Information n a anaana aa 272 HighSpeed fee cae c Re eR RR 275 Inflation Pressures llle 274 JACKING suce rmi euch egeris 320 Life OF Tiresis 2s ace Vase dedi aee a ed aes 282 Load Capacity Pressure Monitor System TPMS 286 Pressure Warning Light 148 Quality Grading iso ec RR ras 405 Radial coetus oor deste ated ears dies 275 Repl c mient 5 cx sce Rer wae Peas ds 282 Rotatie x ia diac er und RU de ER RT e 284 Safety ais sce ang ng eee de ad EE ds 261 SIZES es kee br deve ex EP pr Rex eds 262 SNOW Tires 0 8G a UE eel GEIS Re Gs 277 SPINNE 30 ve ad yg Mond e ste Tg Nw E 280 Tread Wear Indicators
315. ts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 WARNING FUSES WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn web bing etc When replacing a blown fuse always use an ap propriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury fire and or property dam age Before replacing a fuse make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and or disengaged e If the replaced fuse blows again contact an autho rized dealer Continued 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued e If a general protection fuse for safety systems air bag system braking system power unit systems engine system gearbox system or steering system blows conta
316. turn to the sub menu When you have made the required settings briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the sub menu 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME screen or push and hold the MENU button approxi mately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Hill Start Assist This function is used when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill Hill Start Assist maintains the same level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the foot has been removed from the brake pedal Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button Push and release the UP AX or DOWN V button to highlight the Hill Start Assist Push and release the MENU button to enter the Hill Start Assist MENU 2 Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button for setting 3 Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Tire Pressure This function will be used to display the tire pressures individually for all four tires by location Proceed as follows 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button Push and release the UP Ad or DOWN V button to highlight the Tire Pressure Push and release the MENU button to enter the Tire Pressure MENU 2 Push and release the UP or DOWN button to scroll through a
317. uiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a If Equipped R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf If Equipped HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro fluorocarbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmen tal Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product with a low GWP Global Warming Potential However the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning ser vice be performed by authorized dealer or other service facil
318. uld be placed as far from the antenna as possible Do not place items directly on or above the antenna SiriusXM Satellite Radio With over 130 channels SiriusXM Satellite Radio brings you more of what you love Get 69 channels of 10076 commercial free music plus all of your favorite sports news talk and entertainment Hear every NFL game every NASCAR race college sports and more The big gest and most compelling names in talk with Howard Stern and Martha Stewart laugh out loud comedy with Jamie Foxx s The Foxxhole and Blue Collar Comedy plus kids programming world class news local traffic and weather All of this with crystal clear coast to coast coverage Everything worth listening to is now on SiriusXM A one year SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscrip tion is included SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc and its subsidiaries SiriusXM Radio requires a subscription sold separately after trial subscription included with vehicle purchase Prices and programming are provided by SiriusXM and are subject to change Subscriptions governed by Terms amp Conditions available at www siriusxm com customeragreement SiriusXM Ra dio U S service only available to those at least 18 years of age in the 48 contiguous United States D C and PR Service available in Canada see www siriusxm ca SiriusXM Satellite Radio Program Types Program Types can be selected by pushing the A or V buttons T
319. ur authorized dealer LED See Authorized dealer BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo spheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam 1 Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp housing 2 Rotate the bulb counter clockwise 3 Remove the bulb and replace as needed 4 Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place 5 Reinstall the plastic cap 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Front Turn Signal Parking And Daytime Running 3 Remove the plastic cap from the back of the lamp Lamps housing 1 Turn the steering wheel completely to the left or right 4 Rotate bulb socket counter clockwise 2 Open the wheel housing access door 5 Remove the bulb and replace as needed 6 Install the bulb into socket and rotate bulb socket clockwise into lamp locking it in place 7 Reinstall the plastic cap 073310799 Wheel Housing Access Door HEEEEC X 0siillAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 Front Fog Lamps Rear Tail Stop Backup And Turn Signal Lamps To replace the front fog lights see your authorized dealer 1 Open the lif
320. ur to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a mal function in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc tion is detected that could affect the air bag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately e e e The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec tion Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately WARNING Ignori
321. urns off after approximately 20 minutes To manually shut the defroster off push the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Bl INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES M TURBO BOOST GAUGE 0 Bl INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ECO ll INSTRUMENT CLUSTER POP LOUNGE IOOC oe ese Bl INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 00 ll INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS ll ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC EVIC Displays EVIC Control Buttons 00 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Setup Menu i taces aeg ae eR aee Change Engine Oil Indicator System 165 Trip Computer uec ice
322. ust take into account the above notes Distance Traveled This value shows the distance covered since the last reset Average Economy This value shows the approximate average consumption since the last reset Instant Economy This indicates the fuel consumption The value is con stantly updated The message will appear on the display if the car is parked with the engine running Average Speed This value shows the vehicle s average speed as a func tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset Travel Time This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Dimmer The EVIC display is provided with a light sensor capable of detecting environmental light conditions and adjust ing the brightness of the instruments accordingly NOTE The brightness of the instrument panel may change while travelling following an event that causes switching from day to night conditions or vice versa in the passenger compartment e g in a tunnel on avenues in shadows under bridges etc To adjust the brightness proceed as follows 1 Push and release the UP Aor DOWN V button to set the required brightness level 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 2 Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing settings Speed Beep S
323. utton flash on the display 2 Push and release the UP Aor DOWN V button to 2 Push and release the DOWN V button Off will select Trip B data Push and release the UP Aor flash on the display DOWN V buttons to turn ON or OFF 3 Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back 3 Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU button approximately one second to go back to the button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings main screen without storing the settings Trip B Data Trip B On Set Time Clock Through this option it is possible to activate On or This function may be used to set the clock through two deactivate Off the Trip B partial trip display submenu items Time and Mode For further information see Trip Computer 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Proceed as follows 1 Briefly push and release the MENU button Push and release the UP A or DOWN V buttons to highlight Set Time Push and release the MENU button Push and release the UP A or DOWN V button to navigate the two sub menu items Select the required option and then push and release the MENU button When accessing the Time sub menu item briefly push and release the MENU button and hours will flash on the display Push and release the UP A or DOWN
324. vanced Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger and position the front occu pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags WARNING Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides en hanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts pretensioners and Advanced Front Air Bags Supplemental Side Air Bags Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SABs Located in the outboard side of the front seats The SABs are marked with a SRS AIRBAG or AIRBAG label sewn into the outboard side of the seats 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es When the SAB deploys it opens the seam on the out board side of the seatback s trim cover The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door
325. vate the washers The wipers will windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is when the vehicle is restarted released Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur mEEEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Rear Windshield Wiper Rotate the end of the windshield wiper washer lever upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings for intermittent wipe operation With the front wind shield wiper active rotate the end of the windshield wiper washer lever upward The rear wiper will operate in the same mode as the front windshield wipers but at half the frequency When the transmission is shifted into REVERSE the rear wiper will automatically operate at Low Speed and return to normal operation when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE 031570084 Rear Wiper Operation NOTE The windshield wipers washers will only oper ate with the ignition in the ON RUN position 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Windshield Washer Operation Push the windshield wiper washer lever toward the instrument panel to activate the rear washer Push and hold the lever for more than a half second and the wipers will activate automa
326. ve post of the discharged vehicle Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle underhood compartment away from the battery WARNING Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electri cal spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury Only use the specific ground point do not use any other exposed metal parts 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then turn the key to RUN position on the vehicle with the discharged battery ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 331 6 Once the vehicle is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence Disconnecting The Jumper Cables 1 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery 2 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 3 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive 4 jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 4 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positi
327. ve post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved using a rocking motion Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE with automatic transmission or 2nd gear and REVERSE with manual transmission while gently pressing the accelerator Use the least amount of accel erator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine 332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se CAUTION CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting be transmission overheating and failure Allow the en tween DRIVE 2nd gear and REVERSE do not spin gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drive train damage may result e Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no trans NOTE Push the ESC Off switch to place the Electronic mission shifting occurring Stability Control ESC system in Partial Off mode before rocking the vehi
328. win dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio antennas Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections on the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesir able reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Instrument Panel Bezels CAUTION When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve hicle read the installation instructions carefully Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the bel
329. witch between two ongoing phone conversations Call waiting is only supported by a subset of compat ible mobile phones Refusing Incoming Call Or Ending A Call you can refuse an incoming call or end a current call by pushing the Phone Hang up button on the steering wheel After pairing and connecting your phone with the BLUE amp ME system you can make phone calls by speaking keywords or pushing buttons on the steering wheel When using the hands free phone the audio output of a phone conversation is heard through your car sound speakers 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Message Reader The BLUE amp ME message reader enables automatic reading through the car sound system of the SMS texts you receive on your Bluetooth wireless technology mobile phone that are received when the phone is paired and connected to the BLUE amp ME system It does not provide access to messages that were received before the device was connected with the BLUE amp ME system The message reader will also interpret many abbreviations and emoticons contained in the SMS text NOTE Not all mobile phones support the SMS text message reader function or automatic phonebook transfer via Bluetooth For further information on the list of compatible mobile phones go to http www fiatusa com find the SUPPORT section near the bottom of web page and click on the Bluetooth logo Message reader functions are managed by the cont
330. xceed 55 mph 90 km h WARNING Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using Tire Service Kit Do not exceed 55 mph 90 km h until the tire is repaired or replaced Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you permanent damage to the kit en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 317 E After Driving If the tire pressure is 19 psi 1 3 Bar or higher Pull over to a safe location Refer to Whenever You Stop 1 Push the Power Button 4 to turn on Tire Service Kit to Use Tire Service Kit before continuing 1 Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to the Air Mode position Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet Uncoil the Air Pump Hose 7 black in color and screw the fitting at the end of hose 7 onto the valve stem Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge 3 If tire pressure is less than 19 psi 1 3 Bar The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver side door opening NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated push the Defla tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing 2 Di
331. y result when using re 3 Turn Signal Indicators placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause The arrow will flash with the exterior turn Qr signal when the turn signal lever is operated Continued 150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator remains on and does not flash or flashes at a rapid rate 4 Electronic Stability Control Malfunction Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator ESC Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles ESC Activation kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE eThe ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN e Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the

2015 FIAT 500 Abarth (Includes Cabrio) Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents